US20120179962A1 - Electronic book with restricted access features - Google Patents
Electronic book with restricted access features Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20120179962A1 US20120179962A1 US13/335,432 US201113335432A US2012179962A1 US 20120179962 A1 US20120179962 A1 US 20120179962A1 US 201113335432 A US201113335432 A US 201113335432A US 2012179962 A1 US2012179962 A1 US 2012179962A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- book
- viewer
- electronic
- user
- electronic book
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/80—Generation or processing of content or additional data by content creator independently of the distribution process; Content per se
- H04N21/81—Monomedia components thereof
- H04N21/8126—Monomedia components thereof involving additional data, e.g. news, sports, stocks, weather forecasts
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/235—Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/235—Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
- H04N21/2351—Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors involving encryption of additional data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/4104—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
- H04N21/4135—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices external recorder
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/422—Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
- H04N21/42204—User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/422—Input-only peripherals, i.e. input devices connected to specially adapted client devices, e.g. global positioning system [GPS]
- H04N21/42204—User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor
- H04N21/42206—User interfaces specially adapted for controlling a client device through a remote control device; Remote control devices therefor characterized by hardware details
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/431—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
- H04N21/4312—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations
- H04N21/4316—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering involving specific graphical features, e.g. screen layout, special fonts or colors, blinking icons, highlights or animations for displaying supplemental content in a region of the screen, e.g. an advertisement in a separate window
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/435—Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/45—Management operations performed by the client for facilitating the reception of or the interaction with the content or administrating data related to the end-user or to the client device itself, e.g. learning user preferences for recommending movies, resolving scheduling conflicts
- H04N21/4508—Management of client data or end-user data
- H04N21/4532—Management of client data or end-user data involving end-user characteristics, e.g. viewer profile, preferences
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/475—End-user interface for inputting end-user data, e.g. personal identification number [PIN], preference data
- H04N21/4753—End-user interface for inputting end-user data, e.g. personal identification number [PIN], preference data for user identification, e.g. by entering a PIN or password
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
- H04N5/44504—Circuit details of the additional information generator, e.g. details of the character or graphics signal generator, overlay mixing circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/60—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for the sound signals
- H04N5/602—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for the sound signals for digital sound signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/08—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division
- H04N7/087—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only
- H04N7/088—Systems for the simultaneous or sequential transmission of more than one television signal, e.g. additional information signals, the signals occupying wholly or partially the same frequency band, e.g. by time division with signal insertion during the vertical blanking interval only the inserted signal being digital
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/162—Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing
- H04N7/163—Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing by receiver means only
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/162—Authorising the user terminal, e.g. by paying; Registering the use of a subscription channel, e.g. billing
- H04N7/165—Centralised control of user terminal ; Registering at central
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
- H04N7/17309—Transmission or handling of upstream communications
- H04N7/17318—Direct or substantially direct transmission and handling of requests
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
- H04N7/17309—Transmission or handling of upstream communications
- H04N7/17336—Handling of requests in head-ends
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N7/00—Television systems
- H04N7/16—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems
- H04N7/173—Analogue secrecy systems; Analogue subscription systems with two-way working, e.g. subscriber sending a programme selection signal
- H04N7/17345—Control of the passage of the selected programme
- H04N7/17354—Control of the passage of the selected programme in an intermediate station common to a plurality of user terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H20/00—Arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast
- H04H20/02—Arrangements for relaying broadcast information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
- H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
- H04H60/09—Arrangements for device control with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time; Arrangements for control of broadcast-related services
- H04H60/14—Arrangements for conditional access to broadcast information or to broadcast-related services
- H04H60/23—Arrangements for conditional access to broadcast information or to broadcast-related services using cryptography, e.g. encryption, authentication, key distribution
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
- H04M1/57—Arrangements for indicating or recording the number of the calling subscriber at the called subscriber's set
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
- H04M2203/00—Aspects of automatic or semi-automatic exchanges
- H04M2203/10—Aspects of automatic or semi-automatic exchanges related to the purpose or context of the telephonic communication
- H04M2203/1058—Shopping and product ordering
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/426—Internal components of the client ; Characteristics thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/47—End-user applications
- H04N21/478—Supplemental services, e.g. displaying phone caller identification, shopping application
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N5/00—Details of television systems
- H04N5/44—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards
- H04N5/445—Receiver circuitry for the reception of television signals according to analogue transmission standards for displaying additional information
- H04N5/45—Picture in picture, e.g. displaying simultaneously another television channel in a region of the screen
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10S—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10S345/00—Computer graphics processing and selective visual display systems
- Y10S345/901—Electronic book with display
Definitions
- This invention is directed to an electronic book unit having one or more electronic books. More specifically, the invention relates to an apparatus and method for restricting access to electronic books.
- Methods and apparatus consistent with the present invention include features for restricting access to electronic books displayed on a viewer.
- the methods and apparatus include displaying an identification of an electronic book on a viewer, receiving information for use in restricting access to the electronic book, and restricting access to the electronic book based upon the information.
- the information may relate to access to the electronic book and the content of the book.
- the information may include identification of potential users of the electronic book, a rating assigned to the electronic book, selected portions of the electronic book, a particular order in which pages of the electronic book are to be viewed, a particular order in which sections of a page of the electronic book are to be viewed, or a mode of the viewer.
- a family use electronic book may restrict children's access to particular content of an electronic book.
- Instructors may also use restricted access features for teaching exercises for their students. For example, they may require selection of pages or sections of pages in a particular order to facilitate a teaching process. They may also restrict access to particular content based upon, for example, an assigned order in which the students are to complete particular assignments.
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram of the primary components of the electronic book selection and delivery system.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic showing an overview of the electronic book selection and delivery system.
- FIG. 3 a is a schematic of the delivery plan for the electronic book selection and delivery system.
- FIG. 3 b is a schematic of an alternate delivery plan.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an operations center.
- FIG. 5 a is a flow diagram of the processing at the operations center and uplink.
- FIG. 5 b is a block diagram of the hardware configuration for an uplink site.
- FIG. 6 a is a block diagram of the hardware configuration for a four component home subsystem.
- FIG. 6 b is a schematic of a two unit home subsystem.
- FIG. 7 is a flow diagram of the processes performed by the video connector.
- FIG. 8 is a block diagram for an example of a library unit.
- FIG. 9 is a flow diagram of some of the processes performed by the library on the received data stream.
- FIG. 10 is a flow diagram of the processes performed by the library unit on information requests from the viewer.
- FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the components for an example of a viewer.
- FIG. 12 is a flow diagram of some of the processes performed by the viewer on an information request from a subscriber.
- FIG. 13 is a chart depicting the menu structure and sequencing of menus in the menu system.
- FIG. 14 a is a schematic of an introductory menu.
- FIG. 14 b is a schematic showing an example of a main menu.
- FIGS. 14 c , 14 d , 14 e , 14 f , 14 g , 14 h , 14 i and 14 j are schematics showing examples of submenus.
- FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an electronic book system for a bookstore or public library.
- FIG. 16 a and FIG. 16 b are schematics of hardware modifications or upgrades to a set top converter.
- FIG. 17 is a schematic showing a set top terminal that includes a data receiver and data transmitter.
- FIG. 18 a is a schematic of a book-on-demand system.
- FIG. 18 b is a schematic of an operations center supporting a book-on-demand system.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram of a main menu for restricted access features for electronic books.
- FIG. 20 is a flow chart of a main menu process.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B are flow charts of a view book routine.
- FIG. 22 is a diagram of a user name screen.
- FIG. 23 is a diagram of a select book screen.
- FIG. 24 is a diagram of an access denied screen.
- FIG. 25 is a diagram of an electronic book cover page screen.
- FIG. 26 is a flow chart of a book ratings routine.
- FIG. 27 is a diagram of a user name and password screen.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram of a book ratings screen.
- FIG. 29 is a flow chart of an implement ratings process.
- FIG. 30 a is a diagram of a page text screen.
- FIG. 30 b is a diagram of a page screen with selected text.
- FIG. 30 c is a diagram of a page screen with restricted text.
- FIG. 30 d is a diagram of a page text- and graphics screen.
- FIG. 30 e is a diagram of a page screen with selected graphics.
- FIG. 30 f is a diagram of a page screen with restricted graphics.
- FIG. 31 is a flow chart of an access levels routine.
- FIG. 32 is a diagram of an access levels and viewer mode screen.
- FIG. 33 is a flow chart of a page-based book view routine.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram of a page-based book view screen.
- FIG. 35 is a flow chart of a content-based book view routine.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram of a content-based book view screen.
- FIG. 37 is a flow chart of a time-based book view routine.
- An electronic book selection and delivery system is a new way to distribute electronic books to bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers.
- the technological breakthroughs of this invention provide a secure system for both delivering selected electronic books and receiving payments.
- the system has an unusual combination of features that provides the consumer with an electronic book unit that has a high tech aura while being very practical, portable, and easy to use.
- the clear advantage of the system is that it eliminates the distribution of any physical object such as a paper book or computer memory device from any book or text distribution system.
- the purchase of an electronic book may become a PAY-PER-READTM event avoiding the overhead, “middle-men,” printing costs, and time delay associated with the current book distribution system.
- Published material and text such as the President's speech, a new law, a court decision on abortion, or O. J. Simpson's testimony can be made immediately available to the consumer at a nominal fee.
- the system is a novel combination of new technology involving the television, cable, telephone, and computer industries. It uses high bandwidth data transmissions, strong security measures, sophisticated digital switching, high resolution visual displays, novel controls, and user friendly interface software.
- the primary components of the text delivery system are the subsystem for placing the text onto a signal path and the subsystem for receiving and selecting text that was placed on the signal path.
- a preferred embodiment of the system includes additional components and optional features that enhance the system.
- the system may be configured for use by bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers.
- the system for consumer use is made up of four subsystems, namely: (1) an operations center, (2) a distribution system, (3) a home subsystem including reception, selection, viewing, transacting and transmission capabilities, and (4) a billing and collection system.
- the operations center performs several primary functions: manipulating text data (including receiving, formatting and storing of text data), security encoding of text, cataloging of books, providing a messaging center capability, and performing uplink functions.
- the system delivers the text from the operations center to consumer homes by inserting text data into an appropriate signal path.
- the insertion of text is generally performed with an encoder at an uplink site that is within or near the operations center. If the signal path is a video signal path, the system can use several lines of the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI), all the lines of the analog video signal, a digital video signal or unused portions of bandwidth to transmit text data.
- VBI Vertical Blanking Interval
- the top ten or twenty book titles may be transmitted with video during normal programming utilizing existing cable, satellite, wireless or broadcast transmission capability without disruption to the subscriber's video reception.
- the entire video signal thousands of books may be transmitted within just one hour of air time.
- Nearly any analog or digital video distribution system may be used to deliver the video signal with included text.
- the text data may also be transmitted over other low and high speed signal paths including a telephone network (e.g., a public switched telephone network) having a high speed connection such as an asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) connection.
- a telephone network e.g., a public switched telephone network
- ADSL asynchronous digital subscriber line
- other delivery systems and methods may be used, such as those disclosed in the related applications identified above.
- the home subsystem performs four primary functions: connecting to the video distribution system, selecting text, storing text, and transacting through a phone or cable communicating mechanism.
- the components of the home subsystem may be configured in a variety of hardware configurations. Each function may be performed by a separate component, the components may be integrated, or the capability of existing cable set top converter boxes, personal computers, and televisions may be utilized.
- a connector, library unit and an electronic book unit, or viewer unit are used.
- the connector portion of the home subsystem receives the analog video signal and strips or extracts the text from the video.
- the home library stores the text signal, provides a user friendly software interface to the system and processes the transactions at the consumer home.
- the viewer provides a screen for viewing text or menus and novel user friendly controls.
- the viewer may also incorporate all the functionality of the home subsystem.
- the viewing device is preferably a portable book shaped viewer which stores one or more electronic books for viewing and provides a screen for interacting with the home library unit.
- a high resolution LCD display is used to both read the books and to interact with the home library software.
- An optional phone connector or return-path cable connection initiates the telephone calls and, with the aid of the library, transmits the necessary data to complete the ordering and billing portion of the consumer transaction.
- the user friendly controls include a bookmark, current book and page turn button.
- the billing and collection system performs transaction management, authorizations, collections and publisher payments automatically utilizing the telephone system. Alternative ordering methods are disclosed in the related applications identified above.
- the primary components of the electronic book selection and delivery system 200 are an encoder 204 , a video distribution system 208 , a connector 212 , and a text selector 216 as shown in FIG. 1 .
- the encoder 204 places textual data on a video signal to form a composite video signal. Although the composite signal may contain only textual data, it usually carries both video and textual data. A variety of equipment and methods may be used to encode text data onto a video signal.
- the video distribution system 208 distributes the composite video signal from the single point of the encoder 204 to multiple locations which have connectors 212 .
- the connector 212 receives the digital or analog video signal from the video distribution system 208 and separates, strips or extracts the text data from the composite video signal. If necessary, the extracted text data is converted into a digital bit stream.
- Text selector 216 works in connection with the connector 212 to select text.
- a connector 212 and text selector 216 combination various methods of selecting and retrieving desired text from a composite or video signal are possible. Text may be preselected, selected as received or selected after being received and stored. A preferred method is for the connector 212 to strip or extract all the text from the video signal and have the text selector 216 screen all the text as received from the connector 212 . The text selector 216 only stores text in long term or permanent memory if the text passes a screening process described below.
- the delivery system 200 includes: an operations center 250 including an uplink site 254 , a video distribution system 208 , a home system 258 including a video connector 212 , a library 262 , a viewer 266 , and a phone connector 270 , telephone system 274 , an interne web site 279 and a billing and collection system 278 .
- the home system 258 may include connections to a television 259 and a personal computer 261 .
- the television 259 and the personal computer 261 may be used to display menu screens, electronic books, electronic files, or any other information associated with the delivery system 200 .
- the television 259 and the personal computer 261 may provide control function that replicate and supplement those of the viewer 266 .
- the operations center 250 receives textual material from outside sources 282 such as publishers, newspapers, and on-line services. Alternately, the outside sources may maintain electronic books at the Internet web site 279 .
- the outside sources 282 may convert textual and graphical material to digital format, or may contract with another vendor to provide this service.
- the operations center 250 may receive the textual and graphical material in various digital formats and may convert the textual material to a standard compressed format for storage. In so doing, the operations center 250 may create a pool of textual material that is available to be delivered to the home system 258 .
- the textual material may be grouped by books or titles for easy access.
- book means textual or graphical information such as contained in any novels, encyclopedias, articles, magazines or manuals.
- title may represent the actual title assigned by an author to a book, or any other designation indicating a particular group, portion, or category of textual information.
- the title may refer to a series of related textual information, a grouping of textual information, or a portion of textual data. For example, “Latest Harlequin Romance”, “Four Child Reading Books (Ages 10-12)”, “Encyclopedia ‘BRITANNICA’TM”, “President's Speech”, “Instruction Manual”, “Schedule of 4th of July Events”, “Pet Handbooks”, “Roe v.
- a picture of a wrench may be a title for a repair book, a picture of a computer a title for a computer book, a graphical symbol of a telephone a title for a telephone book, a drawing of a dagger a title for a mystery book, a picture of a bat and ball a title for a sports book and a picture of tickertape a title for a business book.
- electronic book refers to the electronic counterpart to a “book.”
- the operations center 250 includes an uplink site 254 for placing the text onto a video signal and sending the composite video signal into a video distribution system.
- the uplink site 254 would generally include an encoder 204 (not shown in FIG. 2 ) to encode the text onto a video signal.
- Many analog and digital distribution systems 208 can be used with the delivery system 200 , such as a cable television distribution system, a broadcast television distribution system, video distributed over telephone systems, distribution from the Internet, direct satellite broadcast distribution systems, and other wired and wireless distribution systems.
- the home system 258 performs five primary functions: (1) connecting with a video distribution system, (2) selecting data, (3) storing data, (4) displaying data, and (5) handling transactions.
- An important optional function of the home sub-system 258 is communicating using a telephone communication system 274 .
- the home system 258 is made up of primarily four parts: a video connector 212 or similar type of connector for connecting with the video distribution system 208 , a library unit 262 for storing and processing, an electronic book, or viewer unit, 266 for viewing menus and text and a telephone connector 270 for connecting with a telephone communications system 274 .
- the viewer 266 may include all the functionality of the home system 258 .
- the billing and collection system 278 may be co-located with the operations center 250 or located remote from the operations center 250 .
- the billing and collection system 278 is in communication with the home system 258 via telephone-type communication systems (for example 274 ). Any of a number of telephone type communication systems, such as, a cellular system, will operate with the billing and collection system 278 .
- the billing and collection system 278 records the electronic books or portions of text that are selected or ordered by the subscriber.
- the collection system will charge a subscriber's credit account or bill the subscriber.
- the billing and collection system 278 will monitor that amount due to publishers or other outside sources 282 who have provided textual data or other services such as air time to enable the text delivery system 200 to operate.
- the billing and collecting functions may be incorporated into the Internet web site 279 .
- a subscriber may pay for an electronic book selection by entering a credit card number into a data field of a page of the Internet web site 279 .
- a separate billing and collection system may not be required.
- FIG. 3 a is an expanded overview of a delivery plan 301 for the delivery system 200 .
- the delivery plan 301 supports various types of subscribers and various billing systems.
- FIG. 3 a shows that publishers 282 will provide text transfer 302 to the operations center 250 ′ and receive payments 306 from the billing and collection system 278 ′.
- a separate channel uplink site 254 ′ is shown in this configuration receiving data 310 from the operations center 250 ′.
- the operations center 250 ′ has three separate sections ( 318 , 322 , 326 ) one for text receiving, formatting and reentry 318 , a second for security encoding 322 and a third section for catalog and messaging center functions 326 .
- the billing and collection system 278 ′ shown has two sections ( 330 , 334 ) one for transaction management, authorizations and publisher payments 330 , and the other for customer service 334 .
- the customer service section 334 provides for data entry and access to customer account information.
- Transaction accounting information 338 is supplied to credit card companies 342 by the transaction management section 330 of the billing and collection system 278 ′.
- the credit card companies 342 provide billing 346 to customers either electronically or by mail.
- Three methods or examples for communicating between the subscriber base 348 and the billing and collection system 278 ′ are shown: by telephone switching 350 alone, cellular (PCS) switching 354 and telephone switching 350 combined, and by use of the cable system 358 and the telephone switching 350 .
- the system shown supports both one-way 362 and two-way cable communication 366 with subscribers. Public libraries and schools 370 as well as bookstores 374 may use the delivery system 301 .
- Public libraries and schools 370 would have a modified system to allow the viewer 266 to be checked-out or borrowed while bookstores 374 would rent or sell the viewer 266 and sell the electronic books.
- the bookstores 374 as well as the public libraries and schools 370 may be serviced by cable 378 .
- Optional direct broadcast systems (DOS) 382 can also be used with the delivery system 200 .
- the DBS 382 may provide the electronic books using digital satellite technology, with the electronic books being received via a backyard satellite antenna, for example.
- FIG. 3 b is an alternate delivery plan 301 ′ that provides for electronic book selection and delivery using the Internet.
- the publishers 282 provide the electronic books to be posted at the Internet web site 279 .
- the publishers may convert the text and graphical data to digital format, compress the digital data, and upload the compressed digital data to the Internet web site 279 .
- the publishers 282 may arrange for an outside conversion activity 283 to convert the text and graphical data to digital format.
- the conversion activity 283 may then provide the digital data to the Internet web site 279 .
- a large on-line bookstore could gather publications in electronic form from a variety of publishers, or could convert hard-copy books to electronic form, and post the electronic books on the Internet such as at the Internet web site 279 .
- the electronic books may then be transferred via a public switched telephone network (PSTN), for example, direct to a subscriber 285 , a library 286 and a bookstore 287 .
- PSTN public switched telephone network
- the library 286 and the bookstore 287 may also provide electronic books to the subscriber 285 .
- FIG. 4 is a schematic of an operations center 250 which includes an uplink 254 .
- the operations center 250 gathers text or books by receiving, formatting, storing, and encoding.
- a data stream 302 containing text is received at the operations center 250 by a data receiver 402 .
- the data receiver 402 is under the control of a processor 404 .
- the data stream is formatted using digital logic for formatting 406 which is also under the control of the processor 404 .
- the text generation is handled through text generator hardware 410 which may include a data receiver and a keyboard (not shown).
- the additional text can be added to the text received by the combining hardware 414 that includes digital logic circuitry (not shown).
- the processing at the operations center 250 is controlled by a processor 404 which uses an instruction memory 416 .
- the processor 404 and instruction memory 416 may be supplied by a personal computer or mini-computer.
- the operations center 250 uses a catalog and message memory 420 and the text generator 410 if necessary.
- the data stream of text, catalog and messages is preferably encoded by security module encoding 424 prior to being sent to the uplink module 254 .
- Various encoding techniques may be used by the security encoding module 424 such as the commercial derivative of NSA's encryption algorithm (Data Encryption System (DES)) and General Instrument's DigiCipher II.
- DES Data Encryption System
- the encoded text may be stored in text memory 428 prior to being sent to the uplink 254 .
- a first-in-first-out text memory arrangement may be used under the control of the processor 404 .
- Various types of memory may be used for the text memory 428 including RAM.
- the operations center 250 may use file server technology for the text memory 428 to catalog and spool electronic books for transmission as is described below.
- the delivery system 208 uses high bandwidth transmission techniques such as those defined by the North American Broadcast Teletext Standard (NABTS) and the World System Teletext (WST) standard.
- WST World System Teletext
- a four hundred page book may be transmitted during programming using four lines of the Vertical Blanking Interval at a rate of approximately one book every 1.6 minutes (63,840 bits per second).
- electronic books may be transmitted over a dedicated channel, which interrupts programming so that 246 lines of video can be used to transmit approximately 2,250 books every hour (3.9 Mbits per second).
- a teletext type format is the simplest but possibly the slowest text format to use with the delivery system 200 .
- an encoder 204 is utilized at an uplink site 254 to insert textual data into the analog video signal.
- the delivery of the textual information is completed using existing cable television plant and equipment.
- FIG. 5 a is a flowchart of the steps involved in processing text from the publisher or provider 282 that occurs at the operations center 250 .
- the publisher 282 processes data files of text for books, compresses, encrypts and sends the data files to the operations center 250 or uplink 254 .
- Text files for books are preferably sent one book at a time.
- the uplink 254 or operations center 250 receives and processes the data stream from the publisher 282 .
- part of this processing includes encryption and error correction.
- Block 508 files are broken into smaller packets of information. Header information is added to the packets.
- the bit stream is converted from a serial digital bit stream to an analog bit stream that is compatible with an NTSC video signal.
- Block 512 shows the switching of analog data into the video lines of a video signal.
- the analog data is generally placed either in the VBI or the active video lines. In some instances, it may be preferable to utilize unused portions of bandwidth (such as 5-40 MHZ, 70-75 MHZ, 100-109 MHZ or other guard bands) instead of the video lines.
- FIG. 5 b is an example of a hardware configuration to perform some of the functions for blocks 508 and 512 .
- a video feed 516 is received and processed through a sync stripper 520 .
- the stripped sync signal 532 is used by the digital logic control 524 .
- the digital logic control 524 receives the sync signal 532 and a serial digital bit stream 528 for processing.
- the digital logic control 524 passes the serial digital bit stream to the Digital to Analog converter 536 and outputs a control signal 540 for the video switch 544 .
- the video switch 544 integrates the video feed 516 and analog data stream 548 into a video feed with analog data signal inserted 552 .
- the public telephone system may be used to transmit books to the subscribers.
- An average electronic book would take about 7 minutes to transmit over the public telephone system.
- Using the telephone system it is not necessary to combine video and text into a composite signal. In most other respects, the operation center would remain similar whether text delivery was by telephone or cable.
- File server technology such as that described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,875, entitled AUDIO/VIDEO FILE SERVER INCLUDING DECOMPRESSION/PLAYBACK MEANS, issued to Mincer, et al., and, U.S. Pat. No.
- the public telephone system may be used to provide access to the Internet, where an Internet web site 279 may be accessed.
- Electronic books may be ordered, paid for, and delivered directly from the Internet web site 279 over the telephone system.
- ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
- ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
- FIG. 6 a The hardware configuration for a four component home system 258 is shown in FIG. 6 a .
- FIG. 6 b shows a hardware configuration for a two component home system.
- the hardware components may also be incorporated into a single unit that communicates with a terminal in a television delivery system or with a telephone system by use of a modem, for example.
- the home system 258 performs several functions, such as receiving data and video transmissions, stripping (or extracting) the data from the video signal, screening and storing the data, providing user friendly interface controls and software, displaying menus and text, processing transactions, initiating telephone calls and transmitting billing data.
- Various hardware configurations may be utilized to achieve the desired functions of the home system 258 . For example, as shown in FIG.
- the home system 258 can be configured to utilize the reception and channel tuning capability of the current installed subscriber base of cable converter boxes and televisions 601 .
- the home system 258 can also be designed as an advanced set top terminal converter box with menu generation capability, electronic memory and a telephone modem as described in section V below.
- the electronic components which make up the home system 258 can be arranged in a variety of ways.
- the viewer 266 and library unit 262 are wired together while the remaining components communicate through RF transceivers 604 .
- the library unit 262 In a simple version of the home system 258 there are only two units, the library unit 262 and a viewer 266 .
- FIG. 6 b shows a two unit home system 258 with certain optional features.
- all the functionality of the home system 258 may be incorporated into one electronic book unit, or viewer.
- the viewer 266 is generally equipped with a high resolution viewing area 602 , digital logic (including a key 605 , security 606 , and a microprocessor 621 ), video graphics control and memory 607 , power supply circuitry 602 (not shown), an optional battery 603 and an optional RF transceiver 604 .
- the library unit 262 contains the connector function to the video distribution system 208 , connector function to a public telephone communications system, and memory 600 (which may be removable and portable 600 ′).
- the library unit 262 would include data stripping functions 617 , digital logic 609 , memory storage 600 , power circuitry 610 , optional telephone connections 611 (including cellular or PCN 611 ′), optional battery (not shown), optional tuner module 613 and an optional RF transceiver 604 .
- the video connector 212 and the public telephone system connection 270 , as well as the removable portable memory unit 600 of the library unit 262 may be broken out into separate components.
- FIG. 6 b shows a removable portable hard disk memory 600 ′ with removable cartridges 614 .
- the home system 258 may include an attached keyboard 267 or a wireless keyboard 268 . Both the attached keyboard 267 and the wireless keyboard 268 may be used to communicate with the viewer 266 (not shown) or the library unit 262 .
- the wireless keyboard 268 may communicate via radio frequency (RF) signaling, for example. Therefore, the home system 258 may have as many as six separate components which communicate with each other. The two, three, four, five or six separate components which make up the home system 258 can communicate with each other in a variety of ways, including hardwired connection 615 , RF transceiver 604 , and other wireless methods.
- RF radio frequency
- RF communications are preferred in the home because they allow separate components to be located throughout the home without restriction.
- the data communicated between the units is preferably secure data.
- the library unit 262 may provide power to the viewer 266 through the hardwired connection 615 .
- a single unit may perform all of the home system 258 functions.
- the single unit should use light-weight materials, including a light-weight battery.
- a single unit eliminates the need to communicate (externally) between units. The single unit is less expensive and eliminates duplicative processing, memory storage and power circuitry.
- a cable interface device or cable connector 212 is used to receive and strip the data from the video signal at the consumer's home.
- the cable connector device includes a tuner 613 , while the cable interface device makes use of existing tuning equipment in the home.
- data is stripped from the video signal and stored at the subscriber's location in the library unit 262 .
- the phone connector 270 , and modem 611 initiate telephone calls and transmit ordering and billing information to the operations center 250 or billing and collection system 278 .
- the phone connecter 270 and the modem 611 may be used to provide access to the Internet to order and receive electronic books from an Internet web site.
- a digital connector 619 is provided to communicate digital information with the set top 601 .
- the library unit 262 is the intelligent component of the home system, incorporating the hardware and software necessary to store the text data, generate menus and effect the purchase transactions.
- the library unit 262 also includes the necessary jacks and connections to allow the delivery system 200 to be connected to the viewer 266 .
- the library 262 communicates the text data (electronic book) to the viewer 266 in a secure format which requires a key 605 for decryption.
- the text is generally only decrypted page by page just before viewing.
- FIG. 7 shows the flow of the processes performed by the video connector 212 .
- the video connector receives the video signal 608 , tunes to the channel containing the text data 612 , strips the text data from the video signal 616 , and communicates the text data stream to logic components in the library 620 .
- the connection to the video distribution system is preferably a cable connector to a cable television delivery system, as shown in FIG. 6 b .
- the cable connector includes a data stripper circuit 617 , which accepts video input from either a set top converter, TV or VCR 601 , or an optional tuner block 613 that receives the CATV signal through the cable connector 212 ′.
- the data stripper circuit 617 strips data out of the video, and outputs a digital bit stream to the digital logic portion 609 of the library unit 262 .
- the data is embedded in the video signal either in the vertical blanking interval or the active video portion in an encrypted and compressed format.
- the data stripper circuit 617 can be placed inside the set top converter box 601 , TV, or in the library unit.
- the data stripper circuit 617 outputs the digital bit stream to be used by the library digital logic 609 .
- the video connector 212 may also contain a channel tuner module 613 that can tune to the video channel and provide access to the video that contains the data to be stripped.
- a channel tuner module 613 that can tune to the video channel and provide access to the video that contains the data to be stripped.
- a set top converter, VCR, or TV tuner is not needed in the home system.
- the optional tuner module 613 would instead receive the CATV signal directly through the cable connector 212 .
- FIG. 6 b An embodiment of the library unit 262 for a two unit home system 258 is shown in both FIG. 6 b and FIG. 8 .
- the embodiment shown includes the following optional parts: the video connector 212 , phone connector 270 , RF transceiver 604 , and battery pack 624 in addition to a removal portable memory 600 ′, microprocessor 628 , instruction memory unit 632 , digital logic 636 , and power unit 640 .
- the library unit 262 contains a digital logic section 609 (not shown in FIG. 8 ) which includes the microprocessor 628 , the digital logic 636 and the instruction memory unit 632 .
- the microprocessor 628 is preferably a secure microprocessor such as the Mot SC21 device sold by Motorola.
- the digital logic section 609 will receive the serial digital bit stream from the data stripper circuit 617 and process the data. Error correction will also be performed by the digital logic section 609 and the data will be checked for proper address. If the address of the data is correct and the library unit 262 is authorized to receive the data, the data will be transferred to the memory storage unit 600 , 600 ′. Authorization to receive the data is provided by the cable headend or another distribution point. An authorization code may be sent in the serial digital bit stream.
- the digital logic section 609 will send appropriate text and graphical data to the memory storage unit 600 , 600 ′. It transfers this data in a compressed and encrypted format and the data remains stored in a compressed and encrypted format.
- the memory storage unit of the library may be a removable portable memory unit 600 ′ (as shown in FIGS. 6 a , 6 b and 8 ).
- a variety of options are available for memory storage: a hard disk drive, a hard disk with removable platters, and a CD ROM or memory stick.
- a hard disk drive unit 600 ′ which contains removable platters may also be used. This would provide virtually unlimited library storage capacity.
- Data i.e., electronic book files
- the data may also contain a key or unique ID number that matches the ID or key of the viewer 266 .
- This matching of a unique key or ID number prevents unauthorized transfer of text data from the memory storage unit to an unauthorized viewer.
- Small memory devices such as smart cards, electronic memory cards or PCMCIA cards (personal computer memory card industry association) or memory sticks may also be used to store the data.
- the library unit 262 may accept power from either AC wall power 610 , DC power 640 , or optional battery power 624 .
- the power circuitry 610 , 640 may provide all the voltage necessary from either the battery 624 or AC unit for the various circuitry in the library.
- the power circuitry 610 , 640 may also provide power to the viewer 266 through a single data cable when connected to the viewer.
- the power circuitry 610 , 640 will recharge the battery using AC power when in operation.
- the library unit 262 With the optional battery unit 624 installed, the library unit 262 becomes a portable unit and can still provide power to the viewer 266 .
- power conservation measures may be utilized, such as shutting down the memory system when not in use. When the viewer 266 is being utilized and the library circuitry is not being utilized, virtually all power may be shut down to the library unit 262 .
- the connection to the telephone system may be provided by a modem 611 .
- Various available modems may be used to perform this function.
- cellular phone or PCN phone connections 611 ′ may also be provided.
- the modem may be used to transfer the name and credit card information of the consumer to the billing and collection system 278 .
- the telephone connection 270 may be utilized each time an electronic book is purchased by a consumer to complete and record the transaction.
- the telephone connection 270 may also be used as a means for receiving the electronic books from the operations center 250 or from an Internet web site, by-passing the video distribution system 208 .
- the phone connection 270 may be a separate unit as shown in FIG. 6 b.
- FIG. 9 shows an example of some basic processing performed by the library unit 262 on the data stream 651 received from the video connector 212 or stripper circuit 617 .
- First the data stream 651 is checked for error correction by block 650 . If an error is detected, block 654 de-interleaves the data followed by block 658 running a FEC (Forward Error Correcting) algorithm. The combination of block 650 , 654 and 658 perform the error correction needed on the data stream. If no error correction is necessary the data proceeds to block 662 where packets are individually checked for packet address.
- FEC Forward Error Correcting
- block 666 checks whether the address of the packet matches the library box ID number.
- the library box ID number is a unique number associated with that library unit 262 which is used to ensure security of the data.
- Block 670 determines whether an electronic file has already been opened into which the data packet can be saved. If no data file has been opened then block 674 opens a new data file for that packet. If an electronic file has been opened, then the packet is saved in that electronic file on disk, block 678 . Next, the process checks to see if this is the last packet for a particular book for a particular textual data block being received 682 . If it is the last packet of information, then the electronic file is closed and the directory of available electronic files is updated 686 . Following either block 682 or 686 , the process returns to receive another data packet from the data stream received from the data stripper block.
- the process determines the type of message that is being sent 690 .
- the message may be an index of book titles, menu (and menu graphics) information, announcements, special offerings, discounts, promotions, previews etc.
- the message is then stored in appropriate electronic message file 694 and the process is returned to block 650 to receive another data packet and perform another error check.
- the library unit 262 is able to receive, store and update directories related to the textual data and graphical data (that can be used to depict pictures in a given book or to generate menus). Variations of the processes are possible depending on the format of the data and operating system of the library unit 262 .
- FIG. 10 shows an example of the processing of information requests from the viewer 266 at the library unit 262 .
- Information requests from the viewer 266 are received either through the cable connecting the viewer 266 to the library unit 262 or through wireless transmissions such as RF. It is possible in some embodiments for subscribers' requests to come from a set top converter box 602 (see Section V).
- Information requests received from the viewer 266 generally fall into three categories: (1) directory data of electronic books stored in the library unit 262 , (2) index of all available electronic books on the system, and (3) requests for a specific electronic book (Block 700 ).
- a get directory process 704 answers a request from the viewer 266 for a directory of data showing the electronic books stored at the viewer 266 .
- the directory of data is sent to the viewer 266 so that it may be displayed to the subscriber.
- a get index process 708 handles requests from the viewer 266 for an index of all available electronic books on the home system 258 .
- the library unit 262 will obtain an index of all the available books on the system and transmit that index, process 712 , with menu information to the viewer 266 .
- An open file process 716 replies to a request from the viewer 266 for a specific electronic book.
- the library unit 262 opens an electronic file for the specific electronic book requested by the viewer 266 and preferably transmits the record or transmits the information 720 on a packet-by-packet basis to the viewer 266 . This process of transmitting the specific electronic book, record, or packets to the viewer 266 continues until the last record or packet has been sent, 724 .
- the library unit 262 In addition to the processes shown on FIG. 10 in handling a request for a specific electronic book, the library unit 262 also orders and receives specific electronic books from the operations center 250 using the process as described in the open file process 716 . Following a request for a specific electronic book which is not stored at the library unit 262 , the library unit 262 will proceed to determine the next available time the electronic book will be on the video distribution system 208 and ensure reception and storage of that electronic book (process not shown). In performing this process the library unit 262 will transmit to the viewer 266 information on when it will obtain the text data for the electronic book so that the subscriber may view the electronic book. In addition to timing information, price and other ordering information may also be passed by the library unit 262 to the subscriber.
- FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the viewer 266 showing its internal components.
- the viewer 266 of FIG. 11 is similar to the viewer 266 depicted in FIG. 6 b .
- the viewer 266 is designed to physically resemble a bound book.
- the viewer 266 is made up of five primary components and six optional components: (1) LCD display 602 , (2) digital circuitry (not shown), (3) video graphics controller 607 ′, (4) controls 740 , (5) book memory 728 , (6) optional power supply circuitry 736 , (7) optional battery 603 ′, (8) optional RF transceiver 604 , (9) optional cellular or mobile communicator (608), (10) optional keyboards 267 and 268 , and (11) a speaker/microphone 608 ′.
- a high resolution LCD screen 602 preferably of VGA quality, is used by the viewer 266 to display text and graphic images.
- the screen is preferably the size of one page of a book.
- a two page screen or two screens may also be used with the viewer 266 .
- Digital circuitry that includes a secure microprocessor 621 , instruction memory 732 , and digital logic. Data is transferred to the viewer 266 in compressed and encrypted foil iat.
- the secure microprocessor 621 compares the ID number of the viewer 266 with the incoming data stream and only stores the text data if the ID number of the viewer 266 matches that within the incoming data stream. It is preferred that the viewer 266 not output text data or other data and that the data is decompressed and decrypted only at the moment of viewing and only for the current page being viewed. These measures are preferred because they provide additional security against unauthorized access to data.
- a video graphics controller 607 ′ that is capable of assisting and displaying VGA quality text and graphic images is included in the viewer 266 .
- the graphics controller 60 T is controlled by the digital circuitry described above. Text may be displayed in multiple font sizes.
- the viewer 266 of FIG. 11 has touch panel controls 740 .
- These unique and novel controls 740 allow the consumer to select stored electronic books and electronic books from catalogues, move a cursor, and turn pages in a book.
- preferred controls 740 include forward and reverse page buttons 742 , 741 , a ball (or trackball) 743 for cursor movement, one or more selection buttons 745 , a current book button 747 and a bookmark button 749 (see FIG. 14 a ).
- the controls 740 should be easy to use and conveniently located. Referring to FIG. 14 a , the controls for the viewer 266 may be located below the screen 602 at the bottom portion of the viewer 266 .
- the next page turn button 742 is the most used button 740 and may be located towards the right edge of the page.
- the subscriber is likely to use right hand thumb movements to work the controls particularly the page turn buttons 741 , 742 . Therefore, it is preferred that the buttons be arranged in such a manner that the buttons are easily controlled by a subscriber's right thumb. Generally, this can be accommodated either on the lower portion of the viewer 266 (as shown) or along the right hand margin of the viewer 266 (not shown).
- the current book button 747 and bookmark button 749 are usually the least used of the controls 740 . Therefore, in the example shown those buttons 747 , 749 are located on the inside portion towards the binder of the viewer 266 .
- Locating the ball 743 or other cursor movement device (such as four pointer arrows—not shown) in the bottom center of the viewer 266 is both easier for the subscriber to use and easier in manufacturing the viewer 266 .
- the selection buttons for the cursor 745 are preferably located below the middle diameter of the cursor ball 743 on the right and left sides of the ball as shown. If pointer arrows are used for cursor movement, a selection button 745 may be located in the center of the four arrow buttons (not shown). Again, the most used controls should be located where a subscriber's right hand thumb would normally rest.
- Book memory 728 for at least one electronic book or more of text is included in the viewer 266 .
- the memory 728 stores text and any graphics which represent pictures in a book.
- the memory 728 can also store menu graphics data.
- Two different memory 728 devices may be used in the viewer 266 , one for the instructions for the microprocessor 621 in the digital circuitry and a second type of memory may be used for the book memory 728 (and graphics).
- Various memory devices available on the market may be used such as, ROM, RAM or a small hard disk. Since an electronic book requires approximately 0.6 megabytes of storage, a small hard disk providing approximately 60 MBytes of storage provides memory to store approximately 100 electronic books. The large hard disk drives currently available allow for storage of thousands of electronic books.
- Text for books may be displayed in various font sizes.
- a variety of fonts are stored in instruction 732 or book memory 728 .
- larger or smaller fonts may be recalled from memory 621 , 728 to create displays desired by the subscriber.
- Power supply circuitry 736 in the viewer 266 will accept power from either an AC power source or from an optional battery 603 ′, or the library unit 262 .
- the power supply circuitry 736 provides the necessary voltages to accommodate the various systems within the viewer 266 .
- An optional battery 603 ′ is provided in a preferred embodiment.
- the battery 603 ′ is automatically recharged when AC power is available,
- An optional RF transceiver 604 which provided two-way data link between the viewer 266 and other components of the home system can also be included in the viewer 266 .
- the viewer 266 may include a cellular transceiver for mobile communications.
- FIG. 6 a may be used with the viewer 266 to provide communications between the subscriber and the viewer 266 .
- the speaker and microphone 608 ′ allow the viewer 266 to provide audio signals to the subscriber, and allow the subscriber to provide an audio input.
- the speaker and microphone 608 ′ may be used in conjunction with the cellular transceiver 608 or other telecommunications equipment to provide for reception and transmission of telephony and data.
- the viewer 266 of FIG. 11 has parts available for providing connections to: a library 744 , electronic card memory 748 , CD ROM units 752 , and a portable memory unit 756 (such as that shown in FIG. 6 b 600 ′).
- Various electronic memory cards such as PCMCIA can be used with this viewer 266 .
- the viewer 266 should be lightweight and portable.
- the viewer 266 contains a software operating system that allows electronic books to be stored, read and erased and includes the capability to order electronic books and retain them in memory 728 for a predefined period of time determined by the system operator.
- the software can be configured to allow the electronic book to be read during a period of time (i.e., two weeks) and then automatically erased, read once and erased, or held in memory permanently.
- Each viewer 266 has a unique key 605 . All of the data storage is encrypted with the key 605 for an individual viewer 266 to prevent more than one viewer 266 accessing the text file or electronic book file.
- FIG. 12 is a flow diagram of some of the processes executed by the viewer 266 .
- the viewer 266 receives inputs from the subscriber through touch panel controls 740 . Alternately, the viewer 266 receives inputs from a touchscreen display, the attached keyboard 267 , or the remote keyboard 268 .
- the subscriber's information requests are then processed through an information request process 800 by the viewer 266 .
- a select available book process 804 will select a book menu.
- An open file process 808 will open the electronic files which list the electronic books that are available (related to the category of topic of the menu) and display the menu with the names of the available electronic books.
- a select a book process 812 will process the selection and determine the electronic file that contains the specific electronic book.
- An open file process 816 will open the file for that specific book and normally access the first page. (If a pointer has already been set in that electronic book's file, the process may default to that page.)
- a decision process 820 will then determine which page needs to be displayed. The decision process 820 will determine whether a next page, previous page or a book marked page needs to be displayed. If the pointer for the electronic file is not in the correct location then a get previous page process 828 will move the pointer and obtain the previous page of data from the stored file.
- a decrypt and decompress process 832 will decrypt and decompress the text data and send the data to the video display.
- the video display will generally have a video display memory associated with it and the decrypt and decompress process 832 will send the data directly to that video display memory.
- the circuitry for the display then completes the process of displaying the page of text.
- a save pointer process 840 saves the pointer in memory to the page number in the book that the viewer 266 is currently reading.
- a close files process 844 closes all the electronic files and signals the power circuitry to shut down the power to the various circuits in the viewer 266 .
- the subscriber may also use the controls 740 to access other electronic files using electronic links embedded in a particular electronic file. An electronic link system will be described later in detail.
- the viewer 266 is able to display book selections and display text from those books.
- the delivery system 200 may have a menu system 851 for selecting features and electronic books from the delivery system 200 .
- the operating software and memory required for the menu system 851 may be located at the viewer 266 (e.g., the instruction memory 732 and/or book memory 728 ). However, it may also be located at the library unit 262 (e.g., the instruction memory 632 ) or the library unit 262 and the viewer 266 can share the software and memory needed to operate the menu system 851 . Since the menus are usually displayed on the viewer 266 and it is preferred that the viewer 266 be capable of operating in the absence of the library unit 262 , the basic software and memory to create the menus is more conveniently located at the viewer 266 .
- the menu system 851 allows sequencing between menus and provides menu graphics for graphical displays such as on the LCD display 602 of the viewer 266 . In a system which uses a set top converter these menus may also be displayed on a television screen. In the simplest embodiment, the menus provide basic text information from which the subscriber makes choices. In more sophisticated embodiments, the menus provide visual displays with graphics and icons to assist the subscriber.
- FIG. 13 depicts a menu system 851 with sequencing.
- the primary menus in the system are an introductory menu 850 , a main menu 854 and various submenus 858 .
- Each level of submenus 858 may consist of multiple possible menus for display. The particular menu displayed depends on the selection by the subscriber on the previous shown menu. An example of this tree sequence of one to many menus are the help submenus 887 , 888 . Depending upon the specific help requested, a different level two help menu is displayed to the subscriber.
- FIG. 14 a An example of an introductory menu 850 is shown on FIG. 14 a .
- the introductory menu 850 introduces the viewer 266 to the system and provides initial guidance, announcements and instruction.
- the introductory menu 850 is followed by a main menu 854 , an example of which is shown in FIG. 14 b .
- the main menu provides the viewer 266 with the basic selection or features available in the system.
- FIG. 14 b is an example of a main menu 854 offering many additional features and submenus 858 to the subscriber. For example, FIG.
- 14 b shows that the viewer 266 is able to choose by a point and click method, many options including: (1) free previews, (2) books you can order, (3) books in your library, (4) your current book, (5) help, (6) on-line services and (6) other system features. Following a selection on the main menu 854 , a corresponding submenu 858 is shown.
- FIG. 13 shows thirteen available primary or first level submenus. They are (1) account set up 862 , (2) free previews 866 , (3) book suggestion entries 855 , (4) books in your library 872 , (5) books you can order 878 , (6) your current book 884 , (7) help 887 , (8) available features 890 , (9) messages 893 , (10) account information 896 , (11) outgoing message submenu 898 , (12) show links 970 , and (13) create links 980 .
- FIG. 14 c is an example of a first level submenu for electronic books in your library 872 .
- This “Book In Your Library” example submenu 872 shows six available electronic books by title and author and provides the subscriber with the ability to check a different shelf of books 874 or return to the main menu 854 .
- FIGS. 14 d and 14 e show example submenus 858 for electronic books that may be ordered using the “Books You Can Order” submenu 878 .
- FIG. 14 f is an example of an order selection and confirmation menu 880 ′, which provides a “soft keyboard” 975 for the subscriber to use in placing an electronic book order and which confirms the subscriber's order.
- the subscriber is required to enter a PIN number to complete the subscriber's order.
- the “soft keyboard” 975 could be configured as a full alpha-numeric keyboard, and may be used by the subscriber to add additional information related to a book order. An alphanumeric or similar password may be used to ensure the subscriber is an authorized subscriber.
- the subscriber confirms an order with a PIN or password and then receives a final confirmation screen.
- the final confirmation screen is primarily text and may state: Your book order is now being processed via CABLE.
- Examples of the “Account Set Up Menu” 862 and further submenus 858 related to account set up are shown in FIG. 14 g and FIG. 14 h .
- These submenus 858 allow initialization of an account at the operations center 250 and orders to be charged to credit cards.
- the submenus 858 include the ability to enter data related to your desired PIN number or password, credit cards, phone numbers, etc. It is preferred that the account set up be performed using the telephone system.
- a confirmation menu verifies that the account has been properly set up with the desired PIN or password and credit card.
- Free previews for books 866 are also provided by submenus ( 868 , 870 ). Examples of the free preview menus are shown in FIG. 14 i and FIG. 14 j .
- FIG. 14 i shows a menu depicting various electronic books for which previews are available for viewing. Following an electronic book selection, a screen submenu showing an excerpt of the selected electronic book cover's description is provided along with an excerpt from a critic's review of the selected electronic book. In a preferred embodiment, this preview screen for a particular electronic book also allows the subscriber to select a submenu which provides information about the author.
- the book preview submenu may also include a still video picture or graphics portraying a book cover or a scene from the electronic book.
- FIG. 14 j depicts a preview screen 870 about the author.
- the video may also be provided according to MPEG standards as a short moving video clip. Such a clip could be an interview with the author, for example.
- the author's preview screen 870 shows a picture of the author, provides a short biography, and may allow the subscriber to order the author's books. The price for ordering the authors various electronic books may also be shown on the menu.
- the previews may be provided through an electronic link system, disclosed in the related application identified above.
- the delivery system 200 provides the subscriber with an electronic book suggestion feature (see 855 ). This is accomplished using the menu system 851 and the processor with associated memory located at the viewer 266 , library unit 262 or at the distribution point ( 1020 or 250 ). When necessary, information for the program suggestion feature is sent in the text data of the composite or video signal to the home system 258 . With this feature, books or authors are suggested to a subscriber based upon historical data of the subscriber's previous orders, demographics or mood of the subscriber, other indicators, and/or by text word searches.
- text word searches of preview information (such as book cover descriptions, critics reviews and biographies about the author) and/or text of books or other titles are performed by the library unit 262 using databases stored in the library memory 600 .
- Personalized book or author suggestions are made to the subscriber by obtaining information from the subscriber indicative of general subscriber interests.
- Subscriber entries are solicited from the subscriber preferably using the electronic book suggestion entries submenu 855 . The system uses these subscriber entries either directly or indirectly to search for books or authors to suggest to the subscriber.
- the book suggestion methods may be categorized into two categories, either responsive methods (which respond to a series of subscriber menu entries), or intelligent methods (which analyze data to suggest an electronic book).
- responsive methods which respond to a series of subscriber menu entries
- intelligent methods which analyze data to suggest an electronic book.
- the delivery system 200 determines a list of suggested titles or authors and creates a second or third level submenu 856 , 857 to suggest the titles for subscriber selection.
- Responsive methods of suggesting titles include, for example, the use of mood questions, searching for authors, and keyword searching.
- a series of mood questions can be presented on menus to determine a subscribers interest at a particular time.
- the operations center's 250 processor 404 and instruction memory 416 assign each title mood indicators (and subindicators) from a group such as light, serious, violent, short, long, dull, exciting, complex, easy-read, young theme, old theme, adventure, romance, drama, fiction, science-fiction, etc. These indicators are sent to the home system 258 with the text data and are stored in library memory 600 .
- the processor 404 associates a set of indicators with the subscriber's request and a set of electronic books with matching indicators are located for suggesting to the subscriber.
- Responsive searches for authors or keywords are generally performed by the library processor 628 and instruction memory 632 on data stored in the library memory 600 .
- a keyword given by the subscriber may be searched for a match in library memory 600 storing the book reviews, critics and previews databases.
- the title “Hunt For Red October” may be located by the library processor 628 using instruction from a routine in the instruction memory 632 .
- Intelligent methods of suggesting programs include analyzing personal profile data on the subscriber and/or historical data about the subscriber such as past books ordered by the subscriber (or buy data). This method is preferred in a book on demand system and can be performed at the distribution point or operations center 250 by the on-site processor 404 using subscriber databases stored in memory 428 .
- the home system 258 receives the text data including program suggestion information from the distribution point or operations center 250 and generates the program suggestion submenus 855 , 856 , 857 using the same text data receiving 212 and viewer menu generation hardware (e.g., 607 , 621 ) described above.
- Software routines and algorithms stored in instruction memories e.g. 632 , 732 ) are used to analyze historical data and book ordered data to determine a line of books to suggest to the subscriber.
- submenus 858 are shown on the “Books In Your Library” submenu 872 and are preferably broken into shelf numbers with submenus for each shelf 874 , 876 .
- the submenus 858 for the “Books You Can Order” submenu 878 is similarly broken out into submenus by shelves 880 , 882 .
- These shelves may each be a category or genre of books. Electronic books may be grouped into categories such as best sellers, novels, fiction, romance, etc. See FIG. 14 d.
- the submenu 858 for “Your Current Book” 884 allows a subscriber to select a current book 884 and then determine what page to view. This selection is confirmed with a level two submenu 885 .
- the help submenu 887 provides the subscriber with additional help screens 888 .
- the submenus 858 for available features 890 are preferably broken out into a sequence of separate submenus for each feature 891 , 892 .
- messages can also be sent with the delivery system 200 .
- a level one message screen provides the subscriber with the ability to select from various messages the subscriber has pending 893 . Each message is then shown on a separate submenu screen 894 , 895 .
- the message may contain text and graphics.
- account information is shown on a level one submenu 896 and then follow-on submenus 858 show the recent orders and your account balance 897 .
- level one submenu for outgoing messages 898 which has a follow-on submenu used as an input screen 899 .
- the billing and collection system 278 (shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 ) utilizes the latest technology in electronic transaction and telephone switching to track orders, authorize deliveries, bill consumers, and credit publishers automatically.
- the telephone calls initiated by the phone connector 270 are received by the billing and collection system 278 which responds immediately without human intervention by placing the order and charging the consumers credit card account. Data is compiled periodically and publishers 282 are credited for sales of their books or other text.
- the billing and collection system 278 may also connect with subscribers through two-way cable connections, cellular, or other communication means.
- billing and collection system 278 communicate with the operations center 250 to track changes in available books and to provide statistical data to the operations center 250 .
- the electronic book system can be modified to be used at public libraries, schools and bookstores.
- FIG. 15 shows one possible arrangement of components for a public library, school or bookstore location.
- the main unit at a public library, school or bookstore is the file server 900 .
- the file server 900 is a large electronic memory unit that can store thousands of electronic books.
- Various electronic storage means may be used in the file servers, such as hard disks, read-write CD ROMs and read-only CD ROMs.
- the system comprises five components; the file server 900 , a converter or video connector 904 , a controller 908 , a viewer 912 , and a catalog printer 916 .
- the software for controlling the system is primarily located in the controller 908 .
- the converter or video connector 904 is similar to those described above.
- the controller unit 908 monitors the data being transferred to the file server 900 by the converter 904 .
- the controller 908 is preferably provided with a viewing screen and several control buttons. When it is necessary to have a larger screen to perform more sophisticated controlling of the system a viewer 266 may be connected to the controller 908 and the viewer screen and controls 740 may be used.
- the controller 908 is only able to download books to public viewers 912 which are authorized to receive books from the particular file server 900 . For security reasons it is not desirable that the public viewer 912 have access to more than one file server 900 . In this way, security can be maintained over the text data for books. It is preferred that the public viewer 912 be limited to receiving one or two electronic books at a time from the controller 908 . When the subscriber of the public viewer 912 needs a new or additional electronic book, the subscriber returns the viewer 912 to the school or public library where the subscriber receives a new electronic book from the controller 908 .
- the titles of the available books may be printed on a catalog printer 916 .
- the catalog printer 916 is connected to the library controller 908 and the titles of the electronic books are downloaded to the catalog printer 916 . None of the coded text for any of the electronic books can be printed using the controller 908 and catalog printer 916 of this system. In order to maintain security over the data, none of the electronic book data is allowed to be downloaded to the printer 916 . Once a complete printout of available electronic book titles, magazines, or other textual material is complete, a hard copy of the catalog 920 can be maintained at the file server 900 .
- the system shown may also be used at bookstores.
- the bookstores can rent the public viewer 912 to customers with the text for one or two electronic books loaded onto the public viewer 912 .
- the public viewer 912 may be provided with an automatic timeout sequence.
- the timeout sequence would erase the textual data for the books after a certain period of time, for example, two weeks. It is expected that after a period of time (perhaps within two weeks) the renter would return the public viewer 912 to the bookstore and receive additional electronic books for viewing.
- Various other configurations are possible for bookstores, schools and public libraries using the file server 900 and public viewer 912 described.
- set top converters such as those made by Scientific Atlanta or General Instruments are presently unequipped to handle the delivery system 200 of the present invention.
- set top converters may be built which include the library functions, hardware modifications are necessary in order to use the delivery system 200 with existing set top converter technology.
- FIGS. 16 a and 16 b are examples of hardware modifications or upgrades.
- a port is used to attach hardware upgrades described below to a set top terminal. Two examples of upgrades to set top converters 601 to assist in receiving and selecting electronic books are shown.
- a menu generation card upgrade ( FIG. 16 a ) and an information download unit ( FIG. 16 b ). Each of these upgrades may be connected to the set top terminal unit through an upgrade port.
- a four wire cable, ribbon cable, IEEE 1394 firewire interface, USB interface, or the like may be used to connect the upgrade to the set top converter 601 .
- a card addition 950 to a set top converter 601 is depicted in FIG. 16 a .
- the card 950 shown provides the additional functionality needed to utilize the book selection system with existing set top converter 601 technology.
- the card 950 may be configured to slip inside the frame of a set top terminal and become part of the set top terminal, an advanced set top terminal.
- the primary functions the card 950 adds to the set top converter 601 are the interpreting of data signals, generating of menus, sequencing of menus, and, ultimately, the ability of the subscriber to select an electronic book using either the television or a viewer 266 .
- the card 950 also provides a method for a remote location, such as the cable headend, to receive information on electronic books ordered.
- the electronic books ordered information and control commands may be passed from the cable headend to the card 950 using telephone lines.
- the primary components of the card 950 are a PC chip CPU 952 , a VGA graphic controller 954 , a video combiner 956 , logic circuitry 958 , NTSC encoder 960 , a receiver 962 , demodulator (not shown), and a dialer 611 ′.
- the card 950 operates by receiving the data text signal from the cable headend through the coaxial cable.
- the logic circuitry 958 of the card 950 receives data 964 , infrared commands 966 , and synchronization signals (not shown) from the set top converter 601 . Menu selections made by the viewer 266 on the remote control are received by the set top converter's 601 IR equipment and passed through to the card 950 .
- the card 950 interprets the ER signal and determines the electronic book (or menu) the subscriber has selected.
- the card 950 modifies the IR command to send the information to the set top converter 601 .
- the modified ER command contains the channel information needed by the set top converter 601 .
- the card 950 is able to transmit electronic books ordered information to the cable headend. It is also possible to receive the electronic books over the telephone lines and by-pass the video distribution system.
- the telephone system may be used for example, to provide access to an Internet web site to order and receive electronic books.
- IR commands 966 are transferred from set top terminal 601 to hardware upgrade.
- Hardware upgrades may include a microprocessor, interactive software, processing circuitry, bubble memory, and a long-term memory device. In addition to these basic components, the hardware upgrade may make use of an additional telephone modem or CD-ROM device.
- the information download hardware upgrade 1001 (shown in FIG. 16 b ) allows the subscriber to download large volumes of information from the operations center 250 or cable headend using the set top converter 601 .
- the hardware upgrade 1001 will enable subscribers to download data, such as electronic books and magazines, to local storage.
- the hardware upgrade 1001 is an additional local storage unit 1003 (e.g., hard disk, floppy, optical disk or magnetic cartridge and may include a microprocessor 1005 , instruction memory 1007 , and a random access memory 1009 , as shown in FIG. 16 b ).
- a small portable viewer 266 is also provided with the upgrade 1001 to enable downloaded text to be read without the use of a TV.
- the downloadable information may be text or graphics supplied by the operations center 250 or cable headend.
- electronic books may be downloaded and read anywhere with the portable viewer 266 .
- books may be downloaded and stored in compressed form for later decompression.
- the electronic books would be decompressed only at the time of viewing.
- Important text that the public desires immediate access may made available through this system. Text such as the President's speech, a new law, or a recent abortion decision rendered by the Supreme Court may be made immediately available.
- electronic book ordering information is stored at each set top terminal until it is polled by the cable headend using a polling request message format.
- a polling request message format consists of six fields, namely: (1) a leading flag at the beginning of the message, (2) an address field, (3) a subscriber region designation, (4) a set top terminal identifier that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit, (5) an information field, and (6) a trailing flag at the end of the message.
- P/F polling command/response
- a similar response frame format for information communicated by the set top terminal to the cable headend in response to the polling request may be used.
- FIG. 17 shows a preferred set top converter that includes a data receiver 617 and a data transmitter 1011 .
- the data transmitter provides upstream data communications capability between the set top converter 601 and the cable headend. Upstream data transmissions are accomplished using the polling system described and, using a data transmitter 1011 . Both receiver 617 ′ and transmitter 1011 may be built into the set top converter 601 itself or added through an upgrade module. Regardless of the specific hardware configuration, the set top terminal's data transmission capabilities may be accomplished using the hardware shown in FIG. 17 ,
- FIG. 17 shows RF signals, depicted as being received by a data receiver 617 ′ and tuner 613 working in unison. Both of these devices are interfaced with the microprocessor 1013 , which receives inputs 1015 , from the subscriber, either through a set top converter's keypad, a remote control unit or the viewer 266 . All cable signals intended for reception on the subscriber's TV are accessed by the tuner 613 and subsequently processed by the processing circuitry 1017 .
- This processing circuitry 1017 typically includes additional components (not shown) for descrambling, demodulation, volume control and remodulation on a Channel 3 or 4 TV carrier.
- Data targeted to individual set top converters is received by the data receiver 617 ′ according to each set top converter's specific address or ID. In this way, each addressable set top converter only receives its own data.
- the data receiver 617 ′ may receive set top converter 601 specific data in the information field of the signal frame described or on a separate data carrier located at a convenient frequency in the incoming spectrum.
- the received data includes information regarding electronic books and menus available for selection.
- the subscriber may enter a series of commands 1015 using a keypad or remote control in order to choose an electronic book or menu.
- the microprocessor 1013 instructs the tuner to tune to the proper frequency of the channel carrying data and subsequently instructs the processing circuitry 1017 to begin descrambling of this data.
- the microprocessor 1013 Upon selection of the electronic book, the microprocessor 1013 stores any selection information in local memory (not shown) for later data transmission back to the cable headend.
- the microprocessor 1013 coordinates all CATV signal reception and also interacts with various upstream data transmission components.
- the data transmitter 1011 operates in the return frequency band between 5 and 30 MHZ. In an alternative embodiment, the frequency band of 10 to 15 MHZ may be used. Regardless, however, of the frequency band used, the data transmitter 1011 sends information to the cable headend in the information field of the response frame described.
- the data transmitter 1011 sends information to the cable headend in the information field of the response frame described.
- the electronic book system 200 described may also be configured in a book-on-demand style.
- FIG. 18 a shows one example of a configuration for a books-on-demand system.
- a books-on-demand system requires more powerful two-way communications between the consumer's home, bookstore, school or public library and either the operations center 250 or a distribution site 1020 such as the cable headend. This type of two-way communication can be provided by the hardware shown in FIG. 17 and described above.
- the subscriber selects the electronic book to be download from an available menu of electronic books (see for example FIGS. 14 d and 14 e ).
- the data for menus of available books is usually sent to the subscriber location by the distribution site 1020 .
- information about the subscriber selection (or request) is then communicated to either a distribution point 1020 (such as a cable headend or an Internet web site) or the operations center 250 .
- a distribution point 1020 such as a cable headend or an Internet web site
- the operations center 250 Upon receipt of this request, the needed textual and graphical information for the book is spooled and sent to the subscriber. In this manner, books are only sent when requested by the subscriber and are sent immediately upon demand for the book (or text).
- the text delivery and distribution must be conducted on a strong nodal architectured distribution system, such as, a video-on-demand cable or telephone television system, an Internet web site, or through use of individual telephone access on the public telephone system.
- a strong nodal architectured distribution system such as, a video-on-demand cable or telephone television system, an Internet web site, or through use of individual telephone access on the public telephone system.
- the books-on-demand system allows for a greater selection of electronic books to the subscriber and limits the amount of communicated book data that is unnecessary or unneeded. It also provides the electronic book to the subscriber in a much timelier fashion.
- a books-on-demand system requires a distribution point 1020 to have more sophisticated equipment to access and “spool out” the textual information.
- This can be accomplished using file server technology 1024 for storing the electronic books and ATM 1028 or telephone-type switching (not shown) to distribute the textual information.
- file server technology 1024 for storing the electronic books and ATM 1028 or telephone-type switching (not shown) to distribute the textual information.
- the file server 1024 and distribution technology that can be used in configuring such a books-on-demand system is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,875 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,218,695, cited above.
- FIG. 18 a shows an embodiment for a books-on-demand system that utilizes file server technology.
- the embodiment of FIG. 18 a will support distribution of nearly any digital data.
- Electronic books or textual files are received from publishers 282 and other sources through local feeds 1032 , ATM 1028 , or by satellite dish 1036 .
- the data is then stored in memory 1040 at the file server 1024 .
- the distribution point 1020 may be a cable headend that receives requests from subscribers and delivers text to subscribers over a two-way communication system (such as a video-on-demand system (VOD) 1044 ).
- VOD video-on-demand system
- an Internet web site may serve as the distribution point 1020 .
- the library unit 262 can be connected to either a basic premium-type service cable system 1048 , a near video-on-demand type cable system (or pay-per-view (PPV) 1052 ) or a video-on-demand cable system 1044 . In connecting with either of these three systems the library unit 262 may access the cable directly or may access the system through a set top terminal 601 ′, 601 ′′, or 601 ′′.
- a basic premium-type service cable system 1048 a near video-on-demand type cable system (or pay-per-view (PPV) 1052 ) or a video-on-demand cable system 1044 .
- PSV pay-per-view
- the distribution point 1020 transmits a list of available electronic books through the cable delivery system to the library unit 262 .
- the library unit 262 displays the list of available electronic books on a menu or similar format. As described earlier, it is preferred that the library unit 262 use menus which list categories of available electronic books to form its request from the distribution point 1020 .
- the library unit 262 sends a request signal on the two-way communication system 1044 back to the distribution point 1020 . This request signal can be handled in two ways.
- the library unit 262 either initiates the request or the distribution point 1020 polls the various libraries on the two-way system 1044 .
- the text associated with that book title is transmitted to the library unit 262 using the two-way cable system 1044 .
- FIG. 18 b is an expanded view of a preferred operations center 250 that supports a regional or national books-on-demand system.
- the operations center 250 shown supports distribution of nearly any digital data.
- the operations center 250 supports multiple feeds to receive digital information by tape 1060 , 1060 ′, ATM 1028 , or satellite 1036 .
- the information is processed through an input MUX 1064 and a small file server 1068 before reaching the master file server 1072 .
- Digital data such as electronic books received from publishers 282 is then stored on the master file server 1072 . It is preferred that the digital data is stored compressed in a standard format such as MPEG2.
- a system controller 1076 provides control over the regional or national books-on-demand system. Electronic books may be packaged into groups to provide feeds to various cable headends. In addition, scheduling and marketing research are conducted at the operations center 250 . In order to handle the scheduling and market research, electronic book buy data is received at the operations center 250 through a multiplexer 1082 . Electronic book buy information can be provided by the operation center 250 to the billing and collection system 278 .
- the operations center 250 is also equipped to insert messages or advertisements into the file server. These messages or advertisements will eventually be received by the subscribers.
- the master file server 1072 uses an output multiplexer 1080 and ATM 1028 as well as satellite connections to distribute digital data.
- cable headends receive text data on electronic books from the master file server 1080 through the output multiplexer 1028 and an ATM system 1028 . After receiving the electronic book data, the cable headends store the books in a local file server 1024 .
- FIG. 18 a 's distribution point 1020 is an example of a cable headend which may receive data from the operations center 250 of FIG. 18 b through an ATM hookup 1088 or satellite hookup.
- An electronic book may include various features for restricting access to text or other information contained within it. As discussed below, those features include restricting information in electronic books by user and content. Other features include restricting how a user may access pages of an electronic book based, for example, on page order, content, or time of viewing.
- FIG. 19 is a diagram of a main menu 1100 for restricted access features for electronic books.
- Main menu 1100 may be displayed on the viewer 266 for permitting a user to select various options relating to restricting access to information in electronic books.
- Main menu 1100 has a number of sections for permitting the user to select the options by selecting an appropriate section.
- section refers to a definable portion of the screen, and the act of selecting a section may involve, for example, positioning the cursor or a pointer over the section using trackball 743 and depressing selection buttons 745 to “click on” the section; other cursor-control devices, including peripheral devices, may be used to select a section either by positioning the cursor or entering a particular command
- the sections in main menu 1100 may alternatively have different shapes and may be displayed in a different configuration than that shown.
- the screens may have more or fewer sections depending upon, for example, desired functions or displayed information.
- main menu 1100 and the other described screens may be generated for display on the viewer 266 , or retrieved from memory for display, by library processor 628 operating under control of software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 or by viewer processor 621 operating under control of software modules residing within the instruction memory 732 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- a view book section 1102 permits a user to select an option to view one of the electronic books stored within the viewer 266 or library 262 .
- An enter book ratings section 1104 permits a user to select an option to enter ratings for the stored electronic books in order to control access to the electronic books.
- a rating or book rating is any type of information used to control or restrict access to content of an electronic book.
- ratings may include a range of ratings, and the range of ratings may have associated support levels indicating multiple levels of access such as those provided by the following standard film ratings: G; PG; PG-13; R; and NC-17.
- An access levels and viewer mode section 1106 permits a user to select an option to enter access levels for users in order to control the users' access to the stored electronic books.
- Access levels or user access levels are any type of information used to restrict or control particular users' access to content of electronic books.
- An operating or viewer mode is a particular way in which a viewer restricts or controls access to content of electronic books. It may, for example, restrict access by user access levels, book ratings, a combination of access levels and book ratings, or according to another methodology.
- Sections 1108 , 1110 , and 1112 permit a user to select various options for how a particular electronic book may be viewed.
- a page-based book view section 1108 permits a user to select a page-based book view option, which refers to a feature requiring that pages of an electronic book be viewed in a particular order.
- a content-based book view section 1110 permits a user to select a content-based book view option, which refers to a feature requiring that portions of a particular page of an electronic book be selected in a particular order before viewing a next page in the electronic book.
- a time-based book view section 1112 permits a user to select a time-based book view option, which refers to a feature requiring that a page of an electronic book be viewed for a particular amount of time before viewing a next page in the electronic book.
- FIG. 20 is a flow chart of a main menu process 1120 for processing a user's selection of various sections in main menu 1100 .
- Main menu process 1120 may be implemented within the viewer 266 , the library 262 , or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 for execution by the library processor 628 or within the instruction memory 732 for execution by the viewer processor 621 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- a display main menu process 1122 displays a main menu 1100 on the viewer 266 .
- a select option process 1124 waits for a user to select one of the sections within a main menu 1100 .
- an option process 1126 selects an appropriate routine based upon the user's selected option. If the user selected the view book section 1102 , a view book process 1128 executes a view book routine 1130 . If the user selected the book ratings section 1104 , a book ratings process 1132 executes a book ratings routine 1134 . If the user selected access levels and viewer mode section 1106 , an access levels and viewer mode process 1136 executes an access levels routine 1138 .
- a display page-based book view process 1140 executes a page-based book view routine 1142 . If the user selected the content-based book view section 1110 , a display content-based book view process executes a content-based book view routine 1146 . If the user selected the time based book view section 1112 , a display time-based book view process 1148 executes a time-based book view routine 1150 .
- a decision process 1152 determines if the user has selected another section in the main menu 1100 . If so, the option process 1126 is repeated to process the next selected option.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B are flow charts of view book routine 1130 .
- the view book routine 1130 may comprise software modules stored in a memory, such as the instruction memory 732 of the viewer 266 (see FIG. 11 ).
- the processor 621 then executes the view book routine 1130 .
- the view book routine 1130 includes a viewer mode routine (or module) 1162 to determine the operating mode of the viewer 266 .
- the viewer 266 may operate in a number of different modes, as set by a particular user or determined by default.
- a user level mode module 1164 permits access based upon a particular access level assigned to each user and ratings assigned to the stored electronic books.
- a book rating mode module 1165 permits access based solely upon the ratings assigned to the stored electronic books.
- a user may operate the viewer 266 in neither the user level or book rating modes, shown as an unlimited access mode module 1163 , which effectively disables the restricted access features.
- Other modes or default modes are possible for use with restricted access features.
- the processor 621 using the viewer mode module 1162 determines if the viewer 266 is operating in the user level mode 1164 , the book rating mode 1165 , the unlimited access mode 1163 , or another mode. If operating in the user level mode 1164 , a display name screen module 1166 displays a screen requesting a user's name or other identifier.
- FIG. 22 illustrates an example of a name screen 1210 for display on the viewer 266 and including a name section 1212 for the user to enter a name or other identifier.
- the processor 621 uses a name process module 1168 to receive the user's entered name or identifier.
- An access module 1170 determines the user's permitted access, which it may accomplish by retrieving from a database an access level assigned to the user.
- the database stored for example in the instruction memory unit 632 or within the instruction memory 732 , may include a table cross-referencing user names or identifiers with access levels. Table 1 illustrates an example of access levels one (1) through n and books rates l, m, and n.
- a display module 1172 displays a listing of the stored electronic books or a subset of them that are available to the users based on their entered user identifiers.
- FIG. 23 illustrates a select a book screen 1220 for display on the viewer 266 and including sections 1222 , 1224 , and 1226 identifying stored electronic books 1 , 2 and N, respectively.
- a request module 1174 receives the user's selection of a requested electronic book.
- the user may choose an electronic book for viewing by positioning the cursor on one of the sections 1222 , 1224 and 1226 identifying the desired electronic book in the select a book screen 1220 and selecting a desired section on screen, or by entering a particular command using a keyboard or other peripheral device.
- the processor using a rating module 1176 then retrieves the rating information for the selected electronic book and compares the information with the user's permitted access.
- the rating information may be stored within a header file for each electronic book.
- the information contained in the header file may be used to identify and categorize each electronic book for display and for other purposes, such as associating a rating with the electronic book or for searching.
- this header information may be extracted from the header file and stored in a database resident on the viewer 266 or library unit 262 , such as in memory 600 or 600 ′.
- the header information associated with each electronic book typically includes the information shown in Table 2, and can be stored, for example, in records or other database structures.
- the header file may contain a rating field for storing ratings or rating information for the corresponding electronic book.
- the header file may also contain other fields relevant to controlling access to electronic books.
- the header file may include a restricted version field to identify whether the corresponding electronic book is a restricted or unrestricted version; a page-based book view field to identify information for use in determining the particular order of pages for the page-based book view option; a content-based book view field to identify information for use in determining the particular order of sections for the content-based book view option; and a time-based book view field to identify information for use in determining the particular time of viewing pages for the time-based book view option.
- the processor 621 determines if the user is permitted access to the selected electronic book. It may make this determination by comparing the retrieved rating for the requested electronic book with the permitted access for the user's access level, as shown for example in Table 1. If no access is permitted, the processor 621 uses a display module 1180 and displays an access denied message. FIG. 24 illustrates an access denied screen 1230 for display on the viewer 266 and for displaying an access denied message 1232 . Otherwise, if the user is permitted access, the processor 621 uses an open module 1182 to open and display the requested electronic book, and a display module 1184 to display pages of the electronic book as requested by the user.
- FIG. 25 illustrates a book access screen 1240 displaying a cover page 1242 of a requested electronic book to which access is permitted.
- the book access screen 1240 also displays a page forward button 1244 and a page backward button 1246 to permit a user to page forward and backward, respectively, in the displayed electronic book by selecting the appropriate button.
- the processor 621 uses a decision module 1186 to determine if the user has closed the displayed electronic book and, if so, routine 1130 returns to display module 1172 to display the listing of the stored electronic books in the select a book screen 1220 .
- a user may close a displayed electronic book by selecting an icon displayed on the screen, for example, or by entering, using a keyboard or other device, a particular command.
- the processor 621 uses a display module 1188 , displays the listing of electronic books, as illustrated in the select a book screen 1220 .
- the processor 621 receives a user's requested electronic book, and with a rating module 1192 , retrieves rating information for the requested electronic book and compares the rating information with the viewer access level.
- the processor 621 next uses a decision module 1194 to determine if access to the requested electronic book is permitted by determining, for example, if the rating for the requested electronic book is within the range of ratings for which access is permitted for the particular viewer mode.
- the processor 621 may display an access denied message, as illustrated in the access denied screen 1230 . Otherwise, if access is permitted, the processor 621 uses an open module 1198 to open and display the requested electronic book, and a display process 1200 to display pages of the electronic book as requested by the user, as illustrated in the book access screen 1240 . Using a decision module 1202 , the processor 621 determines if the user closes the displayed electronic book. If so, the view book routine 1130 returns to a display module 1188 to display the listing of electronic books on the select a book screen 1220 . The access levels may be assigned, for example, locally by a particular user or by a supplier or distributor upon sale of an electronic book or providing a subscription to one.
- the processor 621 uses a display module 1167 to display a listing of the stored electronic books or a sub-set of stored electronic books that are available to the user based on the entered user identifier.
- FIG. 23 illustrates the select a book screen 1220 for display on the viewer 266 and includes name sections identifying stored electronic books.
- the processor 621 uses a request module 1169 to receive the user's selection of a requested electronic book. The user may choose an electronic book for viewing by positioning the cursor on a section identifying the desired electronic book on the select a book screen 1220 and selecting the action denied section, or by entering a particular command using a keyboard or other device.
- the processor 621 then uses an open module 1171 to open and display the requested electronic book, and a display module 1173 to display pages of the electronic book as requested by the user.
- FIG. 25 illustrates a book access screen 1240 displaying a cover page 1242 of a requested electronic book to which access is permitted.
- the book access screen 1240 also displays a page forward button 1244 and a page backward button 1246 to permit a user to page forward and backward, respectively, in the displayed electronic book by selecting the appropriate button.
- the processor 621 uses a decision module 1186 to determine if the user has closed the displayed electronic book and, if so, routine 1130 returns to display module 1175 to display the listing of the stored electronic books in the select a book screen 1220 .
- a user may close a displayed electronic book by selecting an icon displayed on the screen, for example, or by entering, using a keyboard or other device, a particular command.
- FIG. 26 is a flow chart of a book ratings routine 1134 .
- the book ratings routine 1134 may be implemented within the viewer 266 , the library 262 , or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 for execution by the library processor 628 or within the instruction memory 732 for execution by the viewer processor 621 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- the processor 621 uses a name/password module 1252 to display a name and password screen for permitting a particular user to enter a name or other identifier for a user and a corresponding password.
- the password may include an alphanumeric string or any type of information used to verify a user's identity. The particular user has the ability to enter and change user access levels and book ratings.
- FIG. 27 illustrates a password screen 1270 for display on the viewer 266 and having name and password sections 1272 and 1274 , respectively, for permitting the user to enter a name or other identifier and a password.
- the processor 621 receives the user's entered name or other identifier and the user's corresponding password.
- the processor 621 uses a compare module 1256 to compare the user's entered password with stored access information relating to rating of the stored electronic books.
- the processor 622 uses a decision module 1258 to determine if the user is permitted to enter book ratings by, for example, determining if the user's name and password matches the stored access information. If not, using a display module 1268 , the processor 621 displays an access denied message, as illustrated in FIG. 24 .
- FIG. 28 illustrates a book ratings screen 1280 for display on the viewer 266 that permits a user to enter ratings for stored electronic books.
- the book ratings screen 1280 displays book sections 1282 , 1284 and 1286 that list electronic books 1 -N. associated with each of the book sections is one of a rating section 1288 , 1290 , and 1292 .
- optional page restrictions sections 1294 - 1294 ′′ may be used to restrict access to specific pages in an electronic book.
- the processor 621 uses a receive module 1262 to receive the user's entered rating information for the stored electronic books and implements the rating information.
- the viewer 266 or library unit 262 may store the rating information in a database structure, such as a table, for later access and retrieval.
- the rating information may relate to a content of a corresponding electronic book by, for example, indicating restriction of particular content, a particular type of content, a particular portion of the content, or another type of restriction.
- the processor 621 then uses a receive standard ratings module 1263 to optionally receive and implement standard ratings, the implementation of which depends upon the particular standard; the standard ratings may be entered by a user or may be predetermined by, for example, a publisher or an operations center.
- the processor 621 determines if the user closes the book ratings screen 1280 . If not, the book ratings routine 1134 may continue to receive rating information. If the user did close the book ratings screen 1280 , a return module 1266 is used to return to the main menu and display the main menu screen 1100 .
- the phrase close a screen or close screen refers to removing from display information displayed on a screen of the viewer, and a user may close a screen by selecting an icon displayed on the screen, for example, or by entering via a keyboard or other device a particular command.
- FIG. 29 is a flow chart of implement ratings module 1262 , including examples of various ways in which the user may restrict access to the stored electronic books.
- the processor 621 uses a receive module 1302 to receive the user's identification of an electronic book to rate, which may be accomplished by determining which section the user selected in the book ratings screen 1280 or by determining in which corresponding section a user entered a rating in screen 1280 .
- the processor 621 may display rating options, if desired by a user, and rating options may be implemented by using rating numbers or characters to determine the type of rating. Alternatively, the processor 621 may present another screen with rating options or present such options within separate sections of the book ratings screen 1280 .
- a receive content module 1310 is used to display a text screen for displaying pages of an electronic book to a user and for permitting a user to identify information to restrict.
- the receive content module 1310 is also used to receive an identification of content to restrict.
- a text screen examples of which are provided in FIGS. 30 a - 30 f , is a screen displaying a page of an electronic book, the page having information possibly including text, graphics, images, video, or other information capable of visual display.
- a receive rating module 1312 is used to receive a rating for the restricted content, and a save module 1314 is used to save the entered rating in the header file for the electronic book and restricts the identified content.
- a receive module 1318 is used to receive identification of pages to restrict, as entered in, for example, in section 1294 of the book ratings screen 1280 .
- a receive rating module 1320 is used to receive a rating for the restricted pages, and a save module 1322 is used to save the rating in the header file for the electronic book and restricts the identified pages.
- a receive module 1326 is used to receive a rating for the restricted images
- a save module 1328 is used to save the rating in the header file for the electronic book and restricts the images.
- a receive module 1332 is used to receive a rating for the restriction
- a save module 1334 is used to save the entered rating in the header file for the electronic book.
- Table 3 provides an example of rating options and particular ratings, if the rating options are determined by characters or numbers entered in the ratings sections 1288 , 1290 , and 1292 , shown in FIG. 28 .
- a user would enter a number, for example, as the particular ratings m, n, o, and p.
- default ratings may be used, as determined for example of different characters or symbols identifying rating options and as further illustrated in Table 3 .
- the viewer 266 may store the entered type of ratings and particular ratings for each electronic book in the header file for each electronic book or in a database table or another type of structure in the instruction memory unit 632 or within the instruction memory 732 to cross-reference the ratings with the electronic books. Ratings may also be based upon standard ratings such as those used in conjunction with the device known as the v-chip, or any type of ratings pre-assigned to the electronic books by, for example, a publisher.
- a decision process module 1336 is used to determine if the user has selected another electronic book to rate. If so, the implement ratings module 1262 returns to the receive module 1302 for the processor 621 to perform the processes for restricting and rating the next selected electronic book.
- FIGS. 30 a - 30 f are diagrams of screens for display on the viewer 266 to illustrate in conjunction with implement ratings module 1262 different ways in which a particular user may restrict access to electronic books.
- FIG. 30 a is a diagram of a page text screen 1340 , which the viewer 266 may display upon a user requesting restriction of specific content.
- a restrict section 1341 permits a user to restrict selected content, and selection of page turn sections 1343 and 1345 permit a user to page backward and forward, respectively, in the displayed electronic book by selecting the appropriate section.
- FIG. 30 b is a diagram of page text screen 1340 with selected text 1342 to be restricted. Upon a user selecting restrict section 1341 , the viewer 266 restricts access to the selected text.
- FIG. 30 c is a diagram of page text screen 1340 with restricted text section 1344 , illustrating removal of the restricted text when viewed by a user who does not have an access level permitting viewing of the restricted text.
- FIG. 30 d is a diagram of a page text and graphics screen 1346 illustrating an image 1348 within a displayed page of an electronic book.
- a user may restrict the image by selecting the image, as indicated in FIG. 30 e illustrating image 1350 having a different shaded background to indicate its selection.
- FIG. 30 f illustrates removal of the image to display a restricted portion 1352 when viewed by a user who does not have an access level permitting viewing of the restricted image.
- the viewer 266 restricts the particular content by saving another version of the restricted electronic book with the restricted portions deleted. Therefore, the viewer 266 may store two versions of the same electronic book for restricting access.
- a first version is the original version, such as that received from a publisher, and includes all content.
- a second version has all restricted content deleted, such as described with respect to FIGS. 30 a - 30 d .
- the header file for each electronic book may use the restricted version field to identify whether the corresponding book is the first (unrestricted) or second (restricted) version, and the restricted version field may also, if desired or necessary, cross-reference the two versions.
- FIG. 31 is a flow chart of an access levels routine 1138 .
- the access levels routine 1138 may be implemented within the viewer 266 , the library 262 , or a combination; for example, the access levels routine 1138 may be implemented by software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 for execution by the library processor 628 or within the instruction memory 732 for execution by the viewer processor 621 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- a display name/password module 1362 is used to display the password screen 1270 permitting a user to enter a name or other identifier and a corresponding password.
- a receive module 1364 is used to receive the user's entered name or other identifier and entered password.
- An electronic book viewer such as the viewer 266 , may contain identification of a default user and password, allowing for initial set-up of additional users and their associated access levels by entering the default information using the password screen 1270 and the receive module 1364 .
- the default user and password information may be pre-assigned and subsequently provided to a particular user.
- a compare module 1366 is used to compare the password with stored access information related to assigning access levels to users.
- a decision module 1368 is used to determine if the particular user is permitted to enter access levels for other users, typically determined by whether the password matches the stored access information. If not, a display module 1370 is used to displays an access denied message, as illustrated in the access denied screen 1230 .
- FIG. 32 illustrates an access levels/viewer mode screen 1400 for display on the viewer 266 .
- the screen 1400 includes an access levels section 1401 permitting the user to enter access levels for other users.
- the screen 1400 includes name sections 1402 , 1404 , and 1406 identifying users and, if necessary, permitting entry of information identifying a potential user.
- Corresponding access levels sections 1408 , 1410 , and 1412 permit the user to enter access levels for, respectively, users identified by sections 1402 , 1404 , and 1406 .
- a viewer mode section 1403 permits the user to enter a mode for the viewer 266 .
- the user may set the viewer 266 in a mode to restrict access by both user access levels and book ratings.
- viewer access level section 1416 the user may restrict access based solely on the book ratings and may enter a particular level in section 1418 to control the level of restriction.
- Table 4 provides an example of electronic books that a user may access based upon a particular viewer access level entered in section 1418 while in the viewer mode.
- the viewer mode restricts access to the stored electronic books based upon a rating for each electronic book.
- a user may enter the parameters r, s, t, and u, or they may be predetermined or established, for example, by a publisher.
- a receive identification module 1374 is used to receive identifications of users, if necessary, in screen 1400 .
- a receive access levels module 1376 is used to receive access levels entered in, for example, access levels sections 1408 , 1410 , and 1412 .
- An associate access levels module 1378 is used to associate the entered access levels with the corresponding users and saves such information in a database structure, such as shown in Table 1, for later access and retrieval.
- a decision module 1380 is used to determine if a viewer mode has been entered in viewer mode section 1403 . If not, a default module 1382 is used to set a default mode. A default mode may be predetermined and stored in the viewer 266 , or determined and entered by a user.
- a decision module 1384 is used to determine if the user has entered a viewer mode based upon access levels by selecting user access levels section 1414 . If not, a receive module 1386 is used to receive a viewer access level in section 1418 , and a save module 1390 is used to save the entered level.
- a save view mode module 1388 is used to save the viewer mode, in this example either a mode based upon user access levels and book ratings (user access level mode) or based solely upon book ratings (viewer access level mode), or neither of those modes.
- a decision module 1392 is used to determine if the user closes screen 1400 . If not, the routine 1138 may continue to receive access levels and viewer modes. If the user does close screen 1400 , a return module 1394 is used to return to the main menu to display main menu screen 1100 .
- FIG. 33 is a flow chart of page-based book view routine 1142 .
- the page-based book view routine 1142 may be implemented within the viewer 266 , the library 262 , or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 for execution by the library processor 628 or within the instruction memory 732 for execution by the viewer processor 621 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- a display module 1422 is used to display an electronic book.
- FIG. 34 illustrates a text screen 1425 for display on the viewer 266 for the page-based book view routine 1142 .
- the text screen 1425 displays a page of an electronic book, and it includes a next page section 1427 for selection by a user to select the next page of the displayed electronic book.
- a request module 1424 is used to receive a user's request for a next page, such as by the user selecting next page section 1427 . Alternatively, a user may be required to perform a predefined action such as taking an interactive quiz, prior to being allowed to move to the next page.
- a decision module 1426 is used to determine if an end of the electronic book is displayed. If so, a return module 1430 is used to return to the main menu to display main menu screen 1100 . If the end of the electronic book is not displayed, a display module 1428 is used to display only the next page of a particular order of pages of the electronic book. The viewer 266 may store a particular order for the pages, such as a sequential order, and therefore require that the user view the pages in sequential order.
- the particular order may be changed by a user to re-order the pages for a subsequent page-based book view, and different stored electronic books may have different associated page orders for viewing them in the page-based book view mode.
- the particular order may be stored in the page-based book view field in the header file for each electronic book, or it may be stored elsewhere and referenced by information in the page-based book view field.
- FIG. 35 is a flow chart of content-based book view routine 1146 .
- the content-based book view routine 1146 may be implemented within the viewer 266 , the library 262 , or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 for execution by the library processor 628 or within the instruction memory 732 for execution by the viewer processor 621 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- a display module 1442 is used to display a page of an electronic book having particular sections.
- FIG. 36 illustrates a content restriction screen 1460 for display on the viewer 266 and having sections 1462 , 1464 , 1466 , 1468 , 1470 , and 1472 .
- the content-based book view routine 1196 restricts access to the electronic book displayed in screen 1460 by displaying the next or another page only when the user selects the sections in a particular order, in this example, in numerical order.
- Other types of restriction are possible for teaching or other purposes.
- an electronic book used for teaching mathematics could include a page or pages with example problems of increasing difficulty. Associated with each problem could be a model answer.
- the user's access to the problems may be restricted, using the routine 1146 , such that the user is provided access to a subsequent problem only after first successfully answering a prior problem.
- the viewer 266 may store a table or other database structure cross-referencing each page of an electronic book with a selection order for the sections on each page.
- the header file for each electronic book may store that information in the content-based book view field, or the content-based book view field may include a reference to the information stored elsewhere.
- the viewer 266 can retrieve that information in order to compare the user's selection with the stored selection to determine whether to display the next page.
- Table 5 provides an example of an order of selection for an electronic book displayed on the content restrictions screen 1460 and possibly having other pages.
- each page may have its own particular selection order in which the displayed sections must be selected to view the next page, and each page may also instruct the user to select the displayed sections in a particular order, for example, sequential, reverse sequential, only the odd numbered sections, or only the even numbered sections.
- the listing of the pages in the table may identify the order in which the pages are to be displayed; alternatively, the viewer 266 may permit the user to view any other page after selecting the sections on a displayed page in the particular order.
- the processor 621 uses a receive process 1444 receives the user's selection of the sections in the displayed page of the electronic book.
- a decision module 1446 is used to determine if the selection satisfies particular criteria relating to the restricted access. If not, a message module 1448 may be used to display a request for the user to reselect the portions. If the selection does satisfy the criteria, a decision module 1450 is used to determine if the end of the electronic book is displayed. If not, a retrieve module 1452 may be used to retrieve the next page of the particular order of pages and returns to display module 1442 to display that page. The next displayed page may also have sections that must be selected in a particular order to again advance to the next page. If the end of the book is displayed, a return module 1454 may be used to return to the main menu to display screen 1100 .
- FIG. 37 is a flow chart of a time-based book view routine 1150 .
- the time-based book view routine 1150 may be implemented within the viewer 266 , the library 262 , or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within the instruction memory unit 632 for execution by the library processor 628 or within the instruction memory 732 for execution by the viewer processor 621 , or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules.
- This routine requires that the user view each page of a displayed electronic book for a particular time period before the viewer 266 will display the next page.
- a display module 1482 may be used to display a page of an electronic book, for example, as shown in text screen 1425 .
- a request module 1484 may be used to receive a requested next page from a user.
- a decision module 1490 may be used to determine if the end of the book is displayed and, if so, a return module 1492 may be used to return to the main menu to display screen 1100 .
- a decision module 1488 is used to determine if a particular amount of time has elapsed since displaying the current page.
- the viewer 266 or library unit 262 may include an internal timer, such as a timer provided by the viewer processor 621 or the library processor 628 , triggered by a page selection in order to determine if the particular amount of time has elapsed.
- the particular amount of time may be predetermined or entered by a particular user, and it may be stored in the time-based book view field of the header file for the corresponding book or referenced by information in the time-based book view field.
- each page may include the same amount of particular time for viewing or varying amounts of time.
- Table 6 is an example of a table providing viewing times for pages of a particular electronic book. Upon display of a particular page by the viewer 266 , it may retrieve the corresponding viewing time for that page from the appropriate table or other database structure and also trigger a timer, or obtain a time stamp or time information from a running timer.
- the viewing time information may be stored in the time-based book view field for the corresponding electronic book, or it may be stored elsewhere and referenced by information in the time-based book view field.
- the listing of pages in the table may identify the order in which the pages are displayed.
- the viewer 266 may obtain another time stamp or time information from the timer and compare it with the previous time stamp or time information to determine an amount of elapsed time since the current page was first displayed. If a sufficient amount of time has elapsed, a display module 1486 may be used to display the next page of a particular order of the pages, such as a sequential order. Otherwise, if a sufficient amount of time has not elapsed, routine 1150 continues displaying the current page.
- the time-based book view routine 1150 may be incorporated into the viewer software to control access to specific book content. For example, if an electronic book includes a page bearing an advertisement, the routine 1150 could prevent that page from being turned until a sufficient time has elapsed to ensure the user has at least had an opportunity to view the advertisement. In another alternative use, the routine 1150 could be used in a school text book to require pages to be turned at a rate set by a teacher, or programmed into the electronic book. In these alternatives, a warning may be provided that an allowed time for viewing has elapsed, prior to a page being turned by the processor 621 .
Abstract
A viewer for displaying electronic books and having various features for restricting access to their content. A user may assign ratings to stored electronic books, or use standard ratings, and assign access levels to potential users. The ratings and access levels determine which electronic books, or portions of the electronic books, a particular user may access on the viewer.
Description
- This application is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/344,492, filed Jun. 25, 1999. Priority is hereby claimed to the preceding application. U.S. application Ser. No. 09/344,492 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/336,247 entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK SELECTION AND DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed Nov. 7, 1994, and U.S. application Ser. No. 08/160,194, entitled ADVANCED SET-TOP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DELIVERY SYSTEMS, filed Dec. 2, 1993, and U.S. application Ser. No. 08/906,469, entitled REPROGRAMMABLE TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON A TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed Aug. 5, 1997 which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 08/160,281, entitled TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON A TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM, filed Dec. 2, 1993, which is now U.S. Pat. No. 5,798,785, dated Aug. 25, 1998. Priority of this application for the years 1993, 1994, 1997, and 1998 is not claimed. All of the preceding patents and patent applications are incorporated herein by reference.
- This application is related to U.S. application Ser. No. 09/237,828, filed on Jan. 27, 1999, entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK ELECTRONIC LINKS, U.S. application Ser. No. 09/289,957, filed on Apr. 13, 1999, entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK ALTERNATIVE DELIVERY SYSTEMS, and U.S. application Ser. No. 09/289,956, filed on Apr. 13, 1999, entitled ELECTRONIC BOOK ALTERNATIVE DELIVERY METHODS, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- This invention is directed to an electronic book unit having one or more electronic books. More specifically, the invention relates to an apparatus and method for restricting access to electronic books.
- Sparked by the concept of an information superhighway, a revolution will take place in the distribution of books. Not since the introduction of Gutenberg's movable typeset printing has the world stood on the brink of such a revolution in the distribution of text material. The definition of the word “book” will change drastically in the near future. Due to reasons such as security, convenience, cost, and other technical problems, book and magazine publishers are currently only able to distribute their products in paper form. This invention solves the problems encountered by publishers.
- Methods and apparatus consistent with the present invention include features for restricting access to electronic books displayed on a viewer. The methods and apparatus include displaying an identification of an electronic book on a viewer, receiving information for use in restricting access to the electronic book, and restricting access to the electronic book based upon the information. The information may relate to access to the electronic book and the content of the book. Alternatively, the information may include identification of potential users of the electronic book, a rating assigned to the electronic book, selected portions of the electronic book, a particular order in which pages of the electronic book are to be viewed, a particular order in which sections of a page of the electronic book are to be viewed, or a mode of the viewer.
- Many uses of the restricted access features are possible. For example, a family use electronic book may restrict children's access to particular content of an electronic book.
- Instructors may also use restricted access features for teaching exercises for their students. For example, they may require selection of pages or sections of pages in a particular order to facilitate a teaching process. They may also restrict access to particular content based upon, for example, an assigned order in which the students are to complete particular assignments.
-
FIG. 1 is a block diagram of the primary components of the electronic book selection and delivery system. -
FIG. 2 is a schematic showing an overview of the electronic book selection and delivery system. -
FIG. 3 a is a schematic of the delivery plan for the electronic book selection and delivery system. -
FIG. 3 b is a schematic of an alternate delivery plan. -
FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an operations center. -
FIG. 5 a is a flow diagram of the processing at the operations center and uplink. -
FIG. 5 b is a block diagram of the hardware configuration for an uplink site. -
FIG. 6 a is a block diagram of the hardware configuration for a four component home subsystem. -
FIG. 6 b is a schematic of a two unit home subsystem. -
FIG. 7 is a flow diagram of the processes performed by the video connector. -
FIG. 8 is a block diagram for an example of a library unit. -
FIG. 9 is a flow diagram of some of the processes performed by the library on the received data stream. -
FIG. 10 is a flow diagram of the processes performed by the library unit on information requests from the viewer. -
FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the components for an example of a viewer. -
FIG. 12 is a flow diagram of some of the processes performed by the viewer on an information request from a subscriber. -
FIG. 13 is a chart depicting the menu structure and sequencing of menus in the menu system. -
FIG. 14 a is a schematic of an introductory menu. -
FIG. 14 b is a schematic showing an example of a main menu. -
FIGS. 14 c, 14 d, 14 e, 14 f, 14 g, 14 h, 14 i and 14 j are schematics showing examples of submenus. -
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of an electronic book system for a bookstore or public library. -
FIG. 16 a andFIG. 16 b are schematics of hardware modifications or upgrades to a set top converter. -
FIG. 17 is a schematic showing a set top terminal that includes a data receiver and data transmitter. -
FIG. 18 a is a schematic of a book-on-demand system. -
FIG. 18 b is a schematic of an operations center supporting a book-on-demand system. -
FIG. 19 is a diagram of a main menu for restricted access features for electronic books. -
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of a main menu process. -
FIGS. 21A and 21B are flow charts of a view book routine. -
FIG. 22 is a diagram of a user name screen. -
FIG. 23 is a diagram of a select book screen. -
FIG. 24 is a diagram of an access denied screen. -
FIG. 25 is a diagram of an electronic book cover page screen. -
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of a book ratings routine. -
FIG. 27 is a diagram of a user name and password screen. -
FIG. 28 is a diagram of a book ratings screen. -
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of an implement ratings process. -
FIG. 30 a is a diagram of a page text screen. -
FIG. 30 b is a diagram of a page screen with selected text. -
FIG. 30 c is a diagram of a page screen with restricted text. -
FIG. 30 d is a diagram of a page text- and graphics screen. -
FIG. 30 e is a diagram of a page screen with selected graphics. -
FIG. 30 f is a diagram of a page screen with restricted graphics. -
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of an access levels routine. -
FIG. 32 is a diagram of an access levels and viewer mode screen. -
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of a page-based book view routine. -
FIG. 34 is a diagram of a page-based book view screen. -
FIG. 35 is a flow chart of a content-based book view routine. -
FIG. 36 is a diagram of a content-based book view screen. -
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of a time-based book view routine. - An electronic book selection and delivery system is a new way to distribute electronic books to bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers. The technological breakthroughs of this invention provide a secure system for both delivering selected electronic books and receiving payments. The system has an unusual combination of features that provides the consumer with an electronic book unit that has a high tech aura while being very practical, portable, and easy to use.
- The clear advantage of the system is that it eliminates the distribution of any physical object such as a paper book or computer memory device from any book or text distribution system. The purchase of an electronic book may become a PAY-PER-READ™ event avoiding the overhead, “middle-men,” printing costs, and time delay associated with the current book distribution system. Published material and text such as the President's speech, a new law, a court decision on abortion, or O. J. Simpson's testimony can be made immediately available to the consumer at a nominal fee.
- The system is a novel combination of new technology involving the television, cable, telephone, and computer industries. It uses high bandwidth data transmissions, strong security measures, sophisticated digital switching, high resolution visual displays, novel controls, and user friendly interface software.
- The primary components of the text delivery system are the subsystem for placing the text onto a signal path and the subsystem for receiving and selecting text that was placed on the signal path. A preferred embodiment of the system includes additional components and optional features that enhance the system. The system may be configured for use by bookstores, public libraries, schools and consumers.
- The system for consumer use is made up of four subsystems, namely: (1) an operations center, (2) a distribution system, (3) a home subsystem including reception, selection, viewing, transacting and transmission capabilities, and (4) a billing and collection system.
- The operations center performs several primary functions: manipulating text data (including receiving, formatting and storing of text data), security encoding of text, cataloging of books, providing a messaging center capability, and performing uplink functions. The system delivers the text from the operations center to consumer homes by inserting text data into an appropriate signal path. The insertion of text is generally performed with an encoder at an uplink site that is within or near the operations center. If the signal path is a video signal path, the system can use several lines of the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI), all the lines of the analog video signal, a digital video signal or unused portions of bandwidth to transmit text data. Using the VBI delivery method, the top ten or twenty book titles may be transmitted with video during normal programming utilizing existing cable, satellite, wireless or broadcast transmission capability without disruption to the subscriber's video reception. Using the entire video signal, thousands of books may be transmitted within just one hour of air time. Nearly any analog or digital video distribution system may be used to deliver the video signal with included text.
- The text data may also be transmitted over other low and high speed signal paths including a telephone network (e.g., a public switched telephone network) having a high speed connection such as an asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) connection. Alternatively, other delivery systems and methods may be used, such as those disclosed in the related applications identified above.
- The home subsystem performs four primary functions: connecting to the video distribution system, selecting text, storing text, and transacting through a phone or cable communicating mechanism. The components of the home subsystem may be configured in a variety of hardware configurations. Each function may be performed by a separate component, the components may be integrated, or the capability of existing cable set top converter boxes, personal computers, and televisions may be utilized. Preferably, a connector, library unit and an electronic book unit, or viewer unit, are used. The connector portion of the home subsystem receives the analog video signal and strips or extracts the text from the video. The home library stores the text signal, provides a user friendly software interface to the system and processes the transactions at the consumer home. The viewer provides a screen for viewing text or menus and novel user friendly controls. The viewer may also incorporate all the functionality of the home subsystem.
- The viewing device is preferably a portable book shaped viewer which stores one or more electronic books for viewing and provides a screen for interacting with the home library unit. A high resolution LCD display is used to both read the books and to interact with the home library software. An optional phone connector or return-path cable connection initiates the telephone calls and, with the aid of the library, transmits the necessary data to complete the ordering and billing portion of the consumer transaction. The user friendly controls include a bookmark, current book and page turn button. The billing and collection system performs transaction management, authorizations, collections and publisher payments automatically utilizing the telephone system. Alternative ordering methods are disclosed in the related applications identified above.
- In one embodiment, the primary components of the electronic book selection and
delivery system 200 are anencoder 204, avideo distribution system 208, aconnector 212, and atext selector 216 as shown inFIG. 1 . Theencoder 204 places textual data on a video signal to form a composite video signal. Although the composite signal may contain only textual data, it usually carries both video and textual data. A variety of equipment and methods may be used to encode text data onto a video signal. Thevideo distribution system 208 distributes the composite video signal from the single point of theencoder 204 to multiple locations which haveconnectors 212. Theconnector 212 receives the digital or analog video signal from thevideo distribution system 208 and separates, strips or extracts the text data from the composite video signal. If necessary, the extracted text data is converted into a digital bit stream.Text selector 216 works in connection with theconnector 212 to select text. - Using a
connector 212 andtext selector 216 combination, various methods of selecting and retrieving desired text from a composite or video signal are possible. Text may be preselected, selected as received or selected after being received and stored. A preferred method is for theconnector 212 to strip or extract all the text from the video signal and have thetext selector 216 screen all the text as received from theconnector 212. Thetext selector 216 only stores text in long term or permanent memory if the text passes a screening process described below. - An overview of the electronic book selection and
delivery system 200 is shown inFIG. 2 . Thedelivery system 200 includes: anoperations center 250 including anuplink site 254, avideo distribution system 208, ahome system 258 including avideo connector 212, alibrary 262, aviewer 266, and aphone connector 270,telephone system 274, aninterne web site 279 and a billing andcollection system 278. Also as shown inFIG. 2 , thehome system 258 may include connections to atelevision 259 and apersonal computer 261. Thetelevision 259 and thepersonal computer 261 may be used to display menu screens, electronic books, electronic files, or any other information associated with thedelivery system 200. In addition, thetelevision 259 and thepersonal computer 261 may provide control function that replicate and supplement those of theviewer 266. - The
operations center 250 receives textual material fromoutside sources 282 such as publishers, newspapers, and on-line services. Alternately, the outside sources may maintain electronic books at theInternet web site 279. Theoutside sources 282 may convert textual and graphical material to digital format, or may contract with another vendor to provide this service. Theoperations center 250 may receive the textual and graphical material in various digital formats and may convert the textual material to a standard compressed format for storage. In so doing, theoperations center 250 may create a pool of textual material that is available to be delivered to thehome system 258. The textual material may be grouped by books or titles for easy access. - As used herein, “book” means textual or graphical information such as contained in any novels, encyclopedias, articles, magazines or manuals. The term “title” may represent the actual title assigned by an author to a book, or any other designation indicating a particular group, portion, or category of textual information. The title may refer to a series of related textual information, a grouping of textual information, or a portion of textual data. For example, “Latest Harlequin Romance”, “Four Child Reading Books (Ages 10-12)”, “Encyclopedia ‘BRITANNICA’™”, “President's Speech”, “Instruction Manual”, “Schedule of 4th of July Events”, “Pet Handbooks”, “Roe v. Wade”, and “The Joy of Cooking” are suitable titles. Also, the title may be a graphical symbol or icon. Thus, a picture of a wrench may be a title for a repair book, a picture of a computer a title for a computer book, a graphical symbol of a telephone a title for a telephone book, a drawing of a dagger a title for a mystery book, a picture of a bat and ball a title for a sports book and a picture of tickertape a title for a business book. The term “electronic book” refers to the electronic counterpart to a “book.”
- The
operations center 250 includes anuplink site 254 for placing the text onto a video signal and sending the composite video signal into a video distribution system. Theuplink site 254 would generally include an encoder 204 (not shown inFIG. 2 ) to encode the text onto a video signal. - Many analog and
digital distribution systems 208, or other telecommunications systems, can be used with thedelivery system 200, such as a cable television distribution system, a broadcast television distribution system, video distributed over telephone systems, distribution from the Internet, direct satellite broadcast distribution systems, and other wired and wireless distribution systems. - The
home system 258 performs five primary functions: (1) connecting with a video distribution system, (2) selecting data, (3) storing data, (4) displaying data, and (5) handling transactions. An important optional function of thehome sub-system 258 is communicating using atelephone communication system 274. Thehome system 258 is made up of primarily four parts: avideo connector 212 or similar type of connector for connecting with thevideo distribution system 208, alibrary unit 262 for storing and processing, an electronic book, or viewer unit, 266 for viewing menus and text and atelephone connector 270 for connecting with atelephone communications system 274. In an alternate arrangement, theviewer 266 may include all the functionality of thehome system 258. - The billing and
collection system 278 may be co-located with theoperations center 250 or located remote from theoperations center 250. In one embodiment, the billing andcollection system 278 is in communication with thehome system 258 via telephone-type communication systems (for example 274). Any of a number of telephone type communication systems, such as, a cellular system, will operate with the billing andcollection system 278. The billing andcollection system 278 records the electronic books or portions of text that are selected or ordered by the subscriber. The collection system will charge a subscriber's credit account or bill the subscriber. In addition, the billing andcollection system 278 will monitor that amount due to publishers or otheroutside sources 282 who have provided textual data or other services such as air time to enable thetext delivery system 200 to operate. - When electronic books are provided via the
Internet web site 279, the billing and collecting functions may be incorporated into theInternet web site 279. For example, a subscriber may pay for an electronic book selection by entering a credit card number into a data field of a page of theInternet web site 279. In this configuration, a separate billing and collection system may not be required. -
FIG. 3 a is an expanded overview of adelivery plan 301 for thedelivery system 200. Thedelivery plan 301 supports various types of subscribers and various billing systems.FIG. 3 a shows thatpublishers 282 will providetext transfer 302 to theoperations center 250′ and receivepayments 306 from the billing andcollection system 278′. A separatechannel uplink site 254′ is shown in thisconfiguration receiving data 310 from theoperations center 250′. Theoperations center 250′ has three separate sections (318, 322, 326) one for text receiving, formatting andreentry 318, a second forsecurity encoding 322 and a third section for catalog and messaging center functions 326. - The billing and
collection system 278′ shown has two sections (330, 334) one for transaction management, authorizations andpublisher payments 330, and the other forcustomer service 334. Thecustomer service section 334 provides for data entry and access to customer account information.Transaction accounting information 338 is supplied tocredit card companies 342 by thetransaction management section 330 of the billing andcollection system 278′. Thecredit card companies 342 providebilling 346 to customers either electronically or by mail. - Three methods or examples for communicating between the
subscriber base 348 and the billing andcollection system 278′ are shown: by telephone switching 350 alone, cellular (PCS) switching 354 and telephone switching 350 combined, and by use of thecable system 358 and the telephone switching 350. The system shown supports both one-way 362 and two-way cable communication 366 with subscribers. Public libraries andschools 370 as well asbookstores 374 may use thedelivery system 301. - Public libraries and
schools 370 would have a modified system to allow theviewer 266 to be checked-out or borrowed whilebookstores 374 would rent or sell theviewer 266 and sell the electronic books. Thebookstores 374 as well as the public libraries andschools 370 may be serviced bycable 378. Optional direct broadcast systems (DOS) 382 can also be used with thedelivery system 200. TheDBS 382 may provide the electronic books using digital satellite technology, with the electronic books being received via a backyard satellite antenna, for example. -
FIG. 3 b is analternate delivery plan 301′ that provides for electronic book selection and delivery using the Internet. InFIG. 3 b, thepublishers 282 provide the electronic books to be posted at theInternet web site 279. The publishers may convert the text and graphical data to digital format, compress the digital data, and upload the compressed digital data to theInternet web site 279. Alternately, thepublishers 282 may arrange for anoutside conversion activity 283 to convert the text and graphical data to digital format. Theconversion activity 283 may then provide the digital data to theInternet web site 279. For example, a large on-line bookstore could gather publications in electronic form from a variety of publishers, or could convert hard-copy books to electronic form, and post the electronic books on the Internet such as at theInternet web site 279. - The electronic books may then be transferred via a public switched telephone network (PSTN), for example, direct to a
subscriber 285, alibrary 286 and abookstore 287. Thelibrary 286 and thebookstore 287 may also provide electronic books to thesubscriber 285. -
FIG. 4 is a schematic of anoperations center 250 which includes anuplink 254. Theoperations center 250 gathers text or books by receiving, formatting, storing, and encoding. Adata stream 302 containing text is received at theoperations center 250 by adata receiver 402. Thedata receiver 402 is under the control of aprocessor 404. After reception, the data stream is formatted using digital logic for formatting 406 which is also under the control of theprocessor 404. If any additional text is being generated at theoperation center 250 locally for insertion into the distributed signal, the text generation is handled throughtext generator hardware 410 which may include a data receiver and a keyboard (not shown). Following processing by thetext generator 410, the additional text can be added to the text received by the combininghardware 414 that includes digital logic circuitry (not shown). - The processing at the
operations center 250 is controlled by aprocessor 404 which uses aninstruction memory 416. Theprocessor 404 andinstruction memory 416 may be supplied by a personal computer or mini-computer. To perform the catalog and messaging functions, theoperations center 250 uses a catalog andmessage memory 420 and thetext generator 410 if necessary. - The data stream of text, catalog and messages is preferably encoded by
security module encoding 424 prior to being sent to theuplink module 254. Various encoding techniques may be used by thesecurity encoding module 424 such as the commercial derivative of NSA's encryption algorithm (Data Encryption System (DES)) and General Instrument's DigiCipher II. Following encoding, the encoded text may be stored intext memory 428 prior to being sent to theuplink 254. A first-in-first-out text memory arrangement may be used under the control of theprocessor 404. Various types of memory may be used for thetext memory 428 including RAM. Theoperations center 250 may use file server technology for thetext memory 428 to catalog and spool electronic books for transmission as is described below. - To transmit textual data (i.e., electronic books), the
delivery system 208 uses high bandwidth transmission techniques such as those defined by the North American Broadcast Teletext Standard (NABTS) and the World System Teletext (WST) standard. Using the WST format (where each line of the Vertical Blanking Interval contains 266 data bits), a four hundred page book, for example, may be transmitted during programming using four lines of the Vertical Blanking Interval at a rate of approximately one book every 1.6 minutes (63,840 bits per second). Alternatively, electronic books may be transmitted over a dedicated channel, which interrupts programming so that 246 lines of video can be used to transmit approximately 2,250 books every hour (3.9 Mbits per second). A teletext type format is the simplest but possibly the slowest text format to use with thedelivery system 200. In either event, anencoder 204 is utilized at anuplink site 254 to insert textual data into the analog video signal. In many other respects, the delivery of the textual information is completed using existing cable television plant and equipment. -
FIG. 5 a is a flowchart of the steps involved in processing text from the publisher orprovider 282 that occurs at theoperations center 250. As shown inblock 500, thepublisher 282 processes data files of text for books, compresses, encrypts and sends the data files to theoperations center 250 oruplink 254. Text files for books are preferably sent one book at a time. As shown inblock 504, theuplink 254 oroperations center 250 receives and processes the data stream from thepublisher 282. Generally, part of this processing includes encryption and error correction. - As shown in
block 508, files are broken into smaller packets of information. Header information is added to the packets. The bit stream is converted from a serial digital bit stream to an analog bit stream that is compatible with an NTSC video signal.Block 512 shows the switching of analog data into the video lines of a video signal. The analog data is generally placed either in the VBI or the active video lines. In some instances, it may be preferable to utilize unused portions of bandwidth (such as 5-40 MHZ, 70-75 MHZ, 100-109 MHZ or other guard bands) instead of the video lines. -
FIG. 5 b is an example of a hardware configuration to perform some of the functions forblocks video feed 516 is received and processed through async stripper 520. The strippedsync signal 532 is used by thedigital logic control 524. Thedigital logic control 524 receives thesync signal 532 and a serialdigital bit stream 528 for processing. Thedigital logic control 524 passes the serial digital bit stream to the Digital toAnalog converter 536 and outputs acontrol signal 540 for thevideo switch 544. Thevideo switch 544 integrates thevideo feed 516 andanalog data stream 548 into a video feed with analog data signal inserted 552. - As an alternative to cable, satellite, broadcast, or other television delivery methods, the public telephone system may be used to transmit books to the subscribers. An average electronic book would take about 7 minutes to transmit over the public telephone system. Using the telephone system, it is not necessary to combine video and text into a composite signal. In most other respects, the operation center would remain similar whether text delivery was by telephone or cable. File server technology (such as that described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,875, entitled AUDIO/VIDEO FILE SERVER INCLUDING DECOMPRESSION/PLAYBACK MEANS, issued to Mincer, et al., and, U.S. Pat. No. 5,218,695, entitled FILE SERVER SYSTEM HAVING HIGH-SPEED WRITE EXECUTION, issued to Noveck, et al., incorporated herein by reference) may be used at the operation center with a telephone system text delivery method.
- As another alternative to cable, television, and telephone system delivery, the public telephone system may be used to provide access to the Internet, where an
Internet web site 279 may be accessed. Electronic books may be ordered, paid for, and delivered directly from theInternet web site 279 over the telephone system. - In any delivery system using the telephone system, individual subscribers may increase the electronic book deliver rate by incorporating high speed modems or other communication devices such as an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) connector, or by use of an Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)
- The hardware configuration for a four
component home system 258 is shown inFIG. 6 a.FIG. 6 b shows a hardware configuration for a two component home system. The hardware components may also be incorporated into a single unit that communicates with a terminal in a television delivery system or with a telephone system by use of a modem, for example. Thehome system 258 performs several functions, such as receiving data and video transmissions, stripping (or extracting) the data from the video signal, screening and storing the data, providing user friendly interface controls and software, displaying menus and text, processing transactions, initiating telephone calls and transmitting billing data. Various hardware configurations may be utilized to achieve the desired functions of thehome system 258. For example, as shown inFIG. 6 b, thehome system 258 can be configured to utilize the reception and channel tuning capability of the current installed subscriber base of cable converter boxes andtelevisions 601. Thehome system 258 can also be designed as an advanced set top terminal converter box with menu generation capability, electronic memory and a telephone modem as described in section V below. - The electronic components which make up the
home system 258 can be arranged in a variety of ways. In the four unit system ofFIG. 6 a theviewer 266 andlibrary unit 262 are wired together while the remaining components communicate throughRF transceivers 604. In a simple version of thehome system 258 there are only two units, thelibrary unit 262 and aviewer 266.FIG. 6 b shows a twounit home system 258 with certain optional features. Finally, all the functionality of thehome system 258 may be incorporated into one electronic book unit, or viewer. - The
viewer 266 is generally equipped with a highresolution viewing area 602, digital logic (including a key 605,security 606, and a microprocessor 621), video graphics control andmemory 607, power supply circuitry 602 (not shown), anoptional battery 603 and anoptional RF transceiver 604. In a two unit arrangement, thelibrary unit 262 contains the connector function to thevideo distribution system 208, connector function to a public telephone communications system, and memory 600 (which may be removable and portable 600′). More specifically, thelibrary unit 262 would includedata stripping functions 617,digital logic 609,memory storage 600,power circuitry 610, optional telephone connections 611 (including cellular orPCN 611′), optional battery (not shown),optional tuner module 613 and anoptional RF transceiver 604. Thevideo connector 212 and the publictelephone system connection 270, as well as the removableportable memory unit 600 of thelibrary unit 262 may be broken out into separate components. (FIG. 6 b shows a removable portablehard disk memory 600′ withremovable cartridges 614.) Finally, thehome system 258 may include an attachedkeyboard 267 or awireless keyboard 268. Both the attachedkeyboard 267 and thewireless keyboard 268 may be used to communicate with the viewer 266 (not shown) or thelibrary unit 262. - The
wireless keyboard 268 may communicate via radio frequency (RF) signaling, for example. Therefore, thehome system 258 may have as many as six separate components which communicate with each other. The two, three, four, five or six separate components which make up thehome system 258 can communicate with each other in a variety of ways, includinghardwired connection 615,RF transceiver 604, and other wireless methods. - RF communications are preferred in the home because they allow separate components to be located throughout the home without restriction. The data communicated between the units is preferably secure data. In addition, the
library unit 262 may provide power to theviewer 266 through thehardwired connection 615. - Alternatively, a single unit may perform all of the
home system 258 functions. The single unit should use light-weight materials, including a light-weight battery. A single unit eliminates the need to communicate (externally) between units. The single unit is less expensive and eliminates duplicative processing, memory storage and power circuitry. - To receive and strip the data from the video signal at the consumer's home, either a cable interface device or
cable connector 212 is used. The cable connector device includes atuner 613, while the cable interface device makes use of existing tuning equipment in the home. In either configuration, data is stripped from the video signal and stored at the subscriber's location in thelibrary unit 262. Thephone connector 270, andmodem 611 initiate telephone calls and transmit ordering and billing information to theoperations center 250 or billing andcollection system 278. Alternatively, thephone connecter 270 and themodem 611 may be used to provide access to the Internet to order and receive electronic books from an Internet web site. Adigital connector 619 is provided to communicate digital information with theset top 601. Thelibrary unit 262 is the intelligent component of the home system, incorporating the hardware and software necessary to store the text data, generate menus and effect the purchase transactions. In addition to anRF transceiver 604, thelibrary unit 262 also includes the necessary jacks and connections to allow thedelivery system 200 to be connected to theviewer 266. As shown inFIG. 6 b, thelibrary 262 communicates the text data (electronic book) to theviewer 266 in a secure format which requires a key 605 for decryption. The text is generally only decrypted page by page just before viewing. - a. The Video Connector
-
FIG. 7 shows the flow of the processes performed by thevideo connector 212. The video connector receives thevideo signal 608, tunes to the channel containing thetext data 612, strips the text data from thevideo signal 616, and communicates the text data stream to logic components in thelibrary 620. - The connection to the video distribution system is preferably a cable connector to a cable television delivery system, as shown in
FIG. 6 b. The cable connector includes adata stripper circuit 617, which accepts video input from either a set top converter, TV orVCR 601, or anoptional tuner block 613 that receives the CATV signal through thecable connector 212′. Thedata stripper circuit 617 strips data out of the video, and outputs a digital bit stream to thedigital logic portion 609 of thelibrary unit 262. The data is embedded in the video signal either in the vertical blanking interval or the active video portion in an encrypted and compressed format. Thedata stripper circuit 617 can be placed inside the settop converter box 601, TV, or in the library unit. Thedata stripper circuit 617 outputs the digital bit stream to be used by the librarydigital logic 609. - The
video connector 212 may also contain achannel tuner module 613 that can tune to the video channel and provide access to the video that contains the data to be stripped. Using theoptional tuner module 613, a set top converter, VCR, or TV tuner is not needed in the home system. Theoptional tuner module 613 would instead receive the CATV signal directly through thecable connector 212. - b. Library
- An embodiment of the
library unit 262 for a twounit home system 258 is shown in bothFIG. 6 b andFIG. 8 . The embodiment shown includes the following optional parts: thevideo connector 212,phone connector 270,RF transceiver 604, andbattery pack 624 in addition to a removalportable memory 600′,microprocessor 628,instruction memory unit 632,digital logic 636, andpower unit 640. - The
library unit 262 contains a digital logic section 609 (not shown inFIG. 8 ) which includes themicroprocessor 628, thedigital logic 636 and theinstruction memory unit 632. Themicroprocessor 628 is preferably a secure microprocessor such as the Mot SC21 device sold by Motorola. Thedigital logic section 609 will receive the serial digital bit stream from thedata stripper circuit 617 and process the data. Error correction will also be performed by thedigital logic section 609 and the data will be checked for proper address. If the address of the data is correct and thelibrary unit 262 is authorized to receive the data, the data will be transferred to thememory storage unit digital logic section 609 will send appropriate text and graphical data to thememory storage unit - i. Memory Storage Unit
- The memory storage unit of the library may be a removable
portable memory unit 600′ (as shown inFIGS. 6 a, 6 b and 8). A variety of options are available for memory storage: a hard disk drive, a hard disk with removable platters, and a CD ROM or memory stick. Referring toFIG. 6 b, a harddisk drive unit 600′ which contains removable platters may also be used. This would provide virtually unlimited library storage capacity. Data (i.e., electronic book files) may be stored in the memory storage unit in a compressed and encrypted format. As is also shown inFIG. 6 b, the data may also contain a key or unique ID number that matches the ID or key of theviewer 266. This matching of a unique key or ID number prevents unauthorized transfer of text data from the memory storage unit to an unauthorized viewer. Small memory devices such as smart cards, electronic memory cards or PCMCIA cards (personal computer memory card industry association) or memory sticks may also be used to store the data. - ii. Power Circuitry
- As shown in
FIGS. 6 b and 8, thelibrary unit 262 may accept power from eitherAC wall power 610,DC power 640, oroptional battery power 624. Thepower circuitry battery 624 or AC unit for the various circuitry in the library. Thepower circuitry viewer 266 through a single data cable when connected to the viewer. Thepower circuitry optional battery unit 624 installed, thelibrary unit 262 becomes a portable unit and can still provide power to theviewer 266. In order to extend battery life, power conservation measures may be utilized, such as shutting down the memory system when not in use. When theviewer 266 is being utilized and the library circuitry is not being utilized, virtually all power may be shut down to thelibrary unit 262. - iii. Connection to the Public Telephone System
- The connection to the telephone system may be provided by a
modem 611. Various available modems may be used to perform this function. As shown inFIG. 6 b, cellular phone orPCN phone connections 611′ may also be provided. When thehome system 258 is first initialized, the modem may be used to transfer the name and credit card information of the consumer to the billing andcollection system 278. Thetelephone connection 270 may be utilized each time an electronic book is purchased by a consumer to complete and record the transaction. Thetelephone connection 270 may also be used as a means for receiving the electronic books from theoperations center 250 or from an Internet web site, by-passing thevideo distribution system 208. Thephone connection 270 may be a separate unit as shown inFIG. 6 b. - iv. Library Processing
-
FIG. 9 shows an example of some basic processing performed by thelibrary unit 262 on thedata stream 651 received from thevideo connector 212 orstripper circuit 617. First thedata stream 651 is checked for error correction byblock 650. If an error is detected, block 654 de-interleaves the data followed byblock 658 running a FEC (Forward Error Correcting) algorithm. The combination ofblock - If the address is a unique address, block 666 checks whether the address of the packet matches the library box ID number. The library box ID number is a unique number associated with that
library unit 262 which is used to ensure security of the data.Block 670 determines whether an electronic file has already been opened into which the data packet can be saved. If no data file has been opened then block 674 opens a new data file for that packet. If an electronic file has been opened, then the packet is saved in that electronic file on disk, block 678. Next, the process checks to see if this is the last packet for a particular book for a particular textual data block being received 682. If it is the last packet of information, then the electronic file is closed and the directory of available electronic files is updated 686. Following either block 682 or 686, the process returns to receive another data packet from the data stream received from the data stripper block. - If the packet address is checked and the address is determined to be a broadcast address, the process determines the type of message that is being sent 690. The message may be an index of book titles, menu (and menu graphics) information, announcements, special offerings, discounts, promotions, previews etc. The message is then stored in appropriate
electronic message file 694 and the process is returned to block 650 to receive another data packet and perform another error check. - Using the process of
FIG. 9 , thelibrary unit 262 is able to receive, store and update directories related to the textual data and graphical data (that can be used to depict pictures in a given book or to generate menus). Variations of the processes are possible depending on the format of the data and operating system of thelibrary unit 262. -
FIG. 10 shows an example of the processing of information requests from theviewer 266 at thelibrary unit 262. Information requests from theviewer 266 are received either through the cable connecting theviewer 266 to thelibrary unit 262 or through wireless transmissions such as RF. It is possible in some embodiments for subscribers' requests to come from a set top converter box 602 (see Section V). - Information requests received from the
viewer 266 generally fall into three categories: (1) directory data of electronic books stored in thelibrary unit 262, (2) index of all available electronic books on the system, and (3) requests for a specific electronic book (Block 700). Aget directory process 704 answers a request from theviewer 266 for a directory of data showing the electronic books stored at theviewer 266. The directory of data is sent to theviewer 266 so that it may be displayed to the subscriber. Aget index process 708 handles requests from theviewer 266 for an index of all available electronic books on thehome system 258. Thelibrary unit 262 will obtain an index of all the available books on the system and transmit that index,process 712, with menu information to theviewer 266. Anopen file process 716 replies to a request from theviewer 266 for a specific electronic book. Thelibrary unit 262 opens an electronic file for the specific electronic book requested by theviewer 266 and preferably transmits the record or transmits theinformation 720 on a packet-by-packet basis to theviewer 266. This process of transmitting the specific electronic book, record, or packets to theviewer 266 continues until the last record or packet has been sent, 724. - In addition to the processes shown on
FIG. 10 in handling a request for a specific electronic book, thelibrary unit 262 also orders and receives specific electronic books from theoperations center 250 using the process as described in theopen file process 716. Following a request for a specific electronic book which is not stored at thelibrary unit 262, thelibrary unit 262 will proceed to determine the next available time the electronic book will be on thevideo distribution system 208 and ensure reception and storage of that electronic book (process not shown). In performing this process thelibrary unit 262 will transmit to theviewer 266 information on when it will obtain the text data for the electronic book so that the subscriber may view the electronic book. In addition to timing information, price and other ordering information may also be passed by thelibrary unit 262 to the subscriber. - c. The Viewer
-
FIG. 11 is a block diagram of theviewer 266 showing its internal components. Theviewer 266 ofFIG. 11 is similar to theviewer 266 depicted inFIG. 6 b. Theviewer 266 is designed to physically resemble a bound book. Theviewer 266 is made up of five primary components and six optional components: (1)LCD display 602, (2) digital circuitry (not shown), (3)video graphics controller 607′, (4) controls 740, (5)book memory 728, (6) optionalpower supply circuitry 736, (7)optional battery 603′, (8)optional RF transceiver 604, (9) optional cellular or mobile communicator (608), (10)optional keyboards microphone 608′. - (1) A high
resolution LCD screen 602, preferably of VGA quality, is used by theviewer 266 to display text and graphic images. The screen is preferably the size of one page of a book. A two page screen or two screens may also be used with theviewer 266. - (2) Digital circuitry that includes a
secure microprocessor 621,instruction memory 732, and digital logic. Data is transferred to theviewer 266 in compressed and encrypted foil iat. Thesecure microprocessor 621 compares the ID number of theviewer 266 with the incoming data stream and only stores the text data if the ID number of theviewer 266 matches that within the incoming data stream. It is preferred that theviewer 266 not output text data or other data and that the data is decompressed and decrypted only at the moment of viewing and only for the current page being viewed. These measures are preferred because they provide additional security against unauthorized access to data. - (3) A
video graphics controller 607′ that is capable of assisting and displaying VGA quality text and graphic images is included in theviewer 266. The graphics controller 60T is controlled by the digital circuitry described above. Text may be displayed in multiple font sizes. - (4) The
viewer 266 ofFIG. 11 has touch panel controls 740. These unique andnovel controls 740 allow the consumer to select stored electronic books and electronic books from catalogues, move a cursor, and turn pages in a book. Typically,preferred controls 740 include forward and reversepage buttons more selection buttons 745, acurrent book button 747 and a bookmark button 749 (seeFIG. 14 a). - The
controls 740 should be easy to use and conveniently located. Referring toFIG. 14 a, the controls for theviewer 266 may be located below thescreen 602 at the bottom portion of theviewer 266. The nextpage turn button 742 is the mostused button 740 and may be located towards the right edge of the page. The subscriber is likely to use right hand thumb movements to work the controls particularly thepage turn buttons current book button 747 andbookmark button 749 are usually the least used of thecontrols 740. Therefore, in the example shown thosebuttons viewer 266. - Locating the
ball 743 or other cursor movement device (such as four pointer arrows—not shown) in the bottom center of theviewer 266 is both easier for the subscriber to use and easier in manufacturing theviewer 266. The selection buttons for thecursor 745 are preferably located below the middle diameter of thecursor ball 743 on the right and left sides of the ball as shown. If pointer arrows are used for cursor movement, aselection button 745 may be located in the center of the four arrow buttons (not shown). Again, the most used controls should be located where a subscriber's right hand thumb would normally rest. - (5)
Book memory 728 for at least one electronic book or more of text is included in theviewer 266. Thememory 728 stores text and any graphics which represent pictures in a book. Thememory 728 can also store menu graphics data. Twodifferent memory 728 devices may be used in theviewer 266, one for the instructions for themicroprocessor 621 in the digital circuitry and a second type of memory may be used for the book memory 728 (and graphics). Various memory devices available on the market may be used such as, ROM, RAM or a small hard disk. Since an electronic book requires approximately 0.6 megabytes of storage, a small hard disk providing approximately 60 MBytes of storage provides memory to store approximately 100 electronic books. The large hard disk drives currently available allow for storage of thousands of electronic books. - Text for books may be displayed in various font sizes. To accommodate various fonts for display, a variety of fonts are stored in
instruction 732 orbook memory 728. Thus larger or smaller fonts may be recalled frommemory - (6)
Power supply circuitry 736 in theviewer 266 will accept power from either an AC power source or from anoptional battery 603′, or thelibrary unit 262. Thepower supply circuitry 736 provides the necessary voltages to accommodate the various systems within theviewer 266. - (7) An
optional battery 603′ is provided in a preferred embodiment. Thebattery 603′ is automatically recharged when AC power is available, - (8) An
optional RF transceiver 604 which provided two-way data link between theviewer 266 and other components of the home system can also be included in theviewer 266. - (9) Also, the
viewer 266 may include a cellular transceiver for mobile communications. - (10) The optional wired (attached)
keyboard 267 and wireless (e.g., RF)keyboard 268 - (see
FIG. 6 a) may be used with theviewer 266 to provide communications between the subscriber and theviewer 266. - (11) The speaker and
microphone 608′ allow theviewer 266 to provide audio signals to the subscriber, and allow the subscriber to provide an audio input. The speaker andmicrophone 608′ may be used in conjunction with thecellular transceiver 608 or other telecommunications equipment to provide for reception and transmission of telephony and data. - The
viewer 266 ofFIG. 11 has parts available for providing connections to: alibrary 744,electronic card memory 748,CD ROM units 752, and a portable memory unit 756 (such as that shown inFIG. 6 b 600′). Various electronic memory cards such as PCMCIA can be used with thisviewer 266. - Security, low power consumption and excellent display technology are desired features of the
viewer 266 design, Theviewer 266 should be lightweight and portable. Theviewer 266 contains a software operating system that allows electronic books to be stored, read and erased and includes the capability to order electronic books and retain them inmemory 728 for a predefined period of time determined by the system operator. The software can be configured to allow the electronic book to be read during a period of time (i.e., two weeks) and then automatically erased, read once and erased, or held in memory permanently. Eachviewer 266 has aunique key 605. All of the data storage is encrypted with the key 605 for anindividual viewer 266 to prevent more than oneviewer 266 accessing the text file or electronic book file. -
FIG. 12 is a flow diagram of some of the processes executed by theviewer 266. Generally, theviewer 266 receives inputs from the subscriber through touch panel controls 740. Alternately, theviewer 266 receives inputs from a touchscreen display, the attachedkeyboard 267, or theremote keyboard 268. The subscriber's information requests are then processed through aninformation request process 800 by theviewer 266. - If the subscriber requests a menu of available electronic books, a select
available book process 804 will select a book menu. Anopen file process 808 will open the electronic files which list the electronic books that are available (related to the category of topic of the menu) and display the menu with the names of the available electronic books. - If the subscriber selects a particular electronic book to read, then a select a
book process 812 will process the selection and determine the electronic file that contains the specific electronic book. Anopen file process 816 will open the file for that specific book and normally access the first page. (If a pointer has already been set in that electronic book's file, the process may default to that page.) Adecision process 820 will then determine which page needs to be displayed. Thedecision process 820 will determine whether a next page, previous page or a book marked page needs to be displayed. If the pointer for the electronic file is not in the correct location then a getprevious page process 828 will move the pointer and obtain the previous page of data from the stored file. Otherwise, a getnext page process 824 will normally obtain the next page of text from the stored electronic file. A decrypt and decompressprocess 832 will decrypt and decompress the text data and send the data to the video display. The video display will generally have a video display memory associated with it and the decrypt and decompressprocess 832 will send the data directly to that video display memory. The circuitry for the display then completes the process of displaying the page of text. - If the subscriber, through the
controls 740, requests (from the information request process 800) that the power be turned off, then a process, 836, of turning the power off will be initiated. Asave pointer process 840 saves the pointer in memory to the page number in the book that theviewer 266 is currently reading. Aclose files process 844 closes all the electronic files and signals the power circuitry to shut down the power to the various circuits in theviewer 266. The subscriber may also use thecontrols 740 to access other electronic files using electronic links embedded in a particular electronic file. An electronic link system will be described later in detail. - With these examples of basic processes the
viewer 266 is able to display book selections and display text from those books. - d. Menu System
- Referring generally to
FIG. 13 , thedelivery system 200 may have amenu system 851 for selecting features and electronic books from thedelivery system 200. The operating software and memory required for themenu system 851 may be located at the viewer 266 (e.g., theinstruction memory 732 and/or book memory 728). However, it may also be located at the library unit 262 (e.g., the instruction memory 632) or thelibrary unit 262 and theviewer 266 can share the software and memory needed to operate themenu system 851. Since the menus are usually displayed on theviewer 266 and it is preferred that theviewer 266 be capable of operating in the absence of thelibrary unit 262, the basic software and memory to create the menus is more conveniently located at theviewer 266. - The
menu system 851 allows sequencing between menus and provides menu graphics for graphical displays such as on theLCD display 602 of theviewer 266. In a system which uses a set top converter these menus may also be displayed on a television screen. In the simplest embodiment, the menus provide basic text information from which the subscriber makes choices. In more sophisticated embodiments, the menus provide visual displays with graphics and icons to assist the subscriber. -
FIG. 13 depicts amenu system 851 with sequencing. The primary menus in the system are anintroductory menu 850, amain menu 854 andvarious submenus 858. In the embodiment shown, there are three levels ofsubmenus 858. in certain instances one or twosubmenus 858 is sufficient to easily direct the subscriber to the selection or information requested. However, there are features in which three ormore submenus 858 make the user interface more friendly for the subscriber. Each level ofsubmenus 858 may consist of multiple possible menus for display. The particular menu displayed depends on the selection by the subscriber on the previous shown menu. An example of this tree sequence of one to many menus are thehelp submenus - An example of an
introductory menu 850 is shown onFIG. 14 a. Generally theintroductory menu 850 introduces theviewer 266 to the system and provides initial guidance, announcements and instruction. Theintroductory menu 850 is followed by amain menu 854, an example of which is shown inFIG. 14 b. The main menu provides theviewer 266 with the basic selection or features available in the system.FIG. 14 b is an example of amain menu 854 offering many additional features andsubmenus 858 to the subscriber. For example,FIG. 14 b shows that theviewer 266 is able to choose by a point and click method, many options including: (1) free previews, (2) books you can order, (3) books in your library, (4) your current book, (5) help, (6) on-line services and (6) other system features. Following a selection on themain menu 854, acorresponding submenu 858 is shown. -
FIG. 13 shows thirteen available primary or first level submenus. They are (1) account set up 862, (2)free previews 866, (3)book suggestion entries 855, (4) books in yourlibrary 872, (5) books you can order 878, (6) yourcurrent book 884, (7)help 887, (8)available features 890, (9)messages 893, (10)account information 896, (11)outgoing message submenu 898, (12) showlinks 970, and (13) createlinks 980.FIG. 14 c is an example of a first level submenu for electronic books in yourlibrary 872. This “Book In Your Library”example submenu 872 shows six available electronic books by title and author and provides the subscriber with the ability to check a different shelf ofbooks 874 or return to themain menu 854.FIGS. 14 d and 14 e show example submenus 858 for electronic books that may be ordered using the “Books You Can Order”submenu 878. -
FIG. 14 f is an example of an order selection andconfirmation menu 880′, which provides a “soft keyboard” 975 for the subscriber to use in placing an electronic book order and which confirms the subscriber's order. In this particular example, the subscriber is required to enter a PIN number to complete the subscriber's order. The “soft keyboard” 975 could be configured as a full alpha-numeric keyboard, and may be used by the subscriber to add additional information related to a book order. An alphanumeric or similar password may be used to ensure the subscriber is an authorized subscriber. In an embodiment, the subscriber confirms an order with a PIN or password and then receives a final confirmation screen. The final confirmation screen is primarily text and may state: Your book order is now being processed via CABLE. -
- Your book will be delivered overnight and your VISA account will be charged $2.95.
- Your book will be available for reading at 6:00 AM EST tomorrow. Make sure that:
- 1. your Library Unit and Cable Connection Unit e plugged in with aerials up tonight; and
- 2. you tune your cable converter to THE BOOK Channel. The TV set does not have to remain on.
or similar language.
- Examples of the “Account Set Up Menu” 862 and
further submenus 858 related to account set up (which provide instructions and account input 864) are shown inFIG. 14 g andFIG. 14 h. Thesesubmenus 858 allow initialization of an account at theoperations center 250 and orders to be charged to credit cards. Thesubmenus 858 include the ability to enter data related to your desired PIN number or password, credit cards, phone numbers, etc. It is preferred that the account set up be performed using the telephone system. A confirmation menu verifies that the account has been properly set up with the desired PIN or password and credit card. - Free previews for
books 866 are also provided by submenus (868, 870). Examples of the free preview menus are shown inFIG. 14 i andFIG. 14 j.FIG. 14 i shows a menu depicting various electronic books for which previews are available for viewing. Following an electronic book selection, a screen submenu showing an excerpt of the selected electronic book cover's description is provided along with an excerpt from a critic's review of the selected electronic book. In a preferred embodiment, this preview screen for a particular electronic book also allows the subscriber to select a submenu which provides information about the author. The book preview submenu may also include a still video picture or graphics portraying a book cover or a scene from the electronic book. An example of such a still video picture or graphics is shown inFIG. 14 j which depicts apreview screen 870 about the author. The video may also be provided according to MPEG standards as a short moving video clip. Such a clip could be an interview with the author, for example. The author'spreview screen 870 shows a picture of the author, provides a short biography, and may allow the subscriber to order the author's books. The price for ordering the authors various electronic books may also be shown on the menu. Alternatively, the previews may be provided through an electronic link system, disclosed in the related application identified above. - In addition to free previews, in more sophisticated embodiments, the
delivery system 200 provides the subscriber with an electronic book suggestion feature (see 855). This is accomplished using themenu system 851 and the processor with associated memory located at theviewer 266,library unit 262 or at the distribution point (1020 or 250). When necessary, information for the program suggestion feature is sent in the text data of the composite or video signal to thehome system 258. With this feature, books or authors are suggested to a subscriber based upon historical data of the subscriber's previous orders, demographics or mood of the subscriber, other indicators, and/or by text word searches. - In a book suggestion embodiment, text word searches of preview information (such as book cover descriptions, critics reviews and biographies about the author) and/or text of books or other titles are performed by the
library unit 262 using databases stored in thelibrary memory 600. Personalized book or author suggestions are made to the subscriber by obtaining information from the subscriber indicative of general subscriber interests. Subscriber entries are solicited from the subscriber preferably using the electronic book suggestion entries submenu 855. The system uses these subscriber entries either directly or indirectly to search for books or authors to suggest to the subscriber. - Generally, the book suggestion methods may be categorized into two categories, either responsive methods (which respond to a series of subscriber menu entries), or intelligent methods (which analyze data to suggest an electronic book). Using a responsive or intelligent method, the
delivery system 200 determines a list of suggested titles or authors and creates a second orthird level submenu - Responsive methods of suggesting titles include, for example, the use of mood questions, searching for authors, and keyword searching. Using the
instruction memory 732 and menu generation hardware (e.g., 607) of theviewer 266, a series of mood questions can be presented on menus to determine a subscribers interest at a particular time. For this methodology, the operations center's 250processor 404 andinstruction memory 416 assign each title mood indicators (and subindicators) from a group such as light, serious, violent, short, long, dull, exciting, complex, easy-read, young theme, old theme, adventure, romance, drama, fiction, science-fiction, etc. These indicators are sent to thehome system 258 with the text data and are stored inlibrary memory 600. Based upon the subscriber entries, theprocessor 404 associates a set of indicators with the subscriber's request and a set of electronic books with matching indicators are located for suggesting to the subscriber. - Responsive searches for authors or keywords (a search word provided by the subscriber) are generally performed by the
library processor 628 andinstruction memory 632 on data stored in thelibrary memory 600. For example, a keyword given by the subscriber may be searched for a match inlibrary memory 600 storing the book reviews, critics and previews databases. Thus, if a subscriber provided an entry of the word “submarine” on an appropriate submenu, the title “Hunt For Red October” may be located by thelibrary processor 628 using instruction from a routine in theinstruction memory 632. - Intelligent methods of suggesting programs include analyzing personal profile data on the subscriber and/or historical data about the subscriber such as past books ordered by the subscriber (or buy data). This method is preferred in a book on demand system and can be performed at the distribution point or
operations center 250 by the on-site processor 404 using subscriber databases stored inmemory 428. Thehome system 258 receives the text data including program suggestion information from the distribution point oroperations center 250 and generates the program suggestion submenus 855, 856, 857 using the same text data receiving 212 and viewer menu generation hardware (e.g., 607, 621) described above. Software routines and algorithms stored in instruction memories (e.g. 632, 732) are used to analyze historical data and book ordered data to determine a line of books to suggest to the subscriber. - The algorithms for this powerful feature of suggesting books or authors to subscribers are disclosed in great detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,559,549, entitled REPROGRAMMABLE TERMINAL FOR SUGGESTING PROGRAMS OFFERED ON A TELEVISION PROGRAM DELIVERY SYSTEM, issued Sep. 24, 1996, and are incorporated herein by reference.
- Referring to
FIG. 13 ,submenus 858 are shown on the “Books In Your Library”submenu 872 and are preferably broken into shelf numbers with submenus for eachshelf submenus 858 for the “Books You Can Order”submenu 878 is similarly broken out into submenus byshelves FIG. 14 d. - Referring to
FIG. 13 , thesubmenu 858 for “Your Current Book” 884 allows a subscriber to select acurrent book 884 and then determine what page to view. This selection is confirmed with a level twosubmenu 885. Thehelp submenu 887 provides the subscriber with additional help screens 888. Thesubmenus 858 foravailable features 890 are preferably broken out into a sequence of separate submenus for eachfeature - Referring to
FIG. 13 , messages can also be sent with thedelivery system 200. A level one message screen provides the subscriber with the ability to select from various messages the subscriber has pending 893. Each message is then shown on aseparate submenu screen - Referring to
FIG. 13 , account information is shown on a level onesubmenu 896 and then follow-onsubmenus 858 show the recent orders and youraccount balance 897. There is also a level one submenu foroutgoing messages 898 which has a follow-on submenu used as aninput screen 899. - In addition to the specific features and submenus described in
FIG. 13 andFIG. 14 a throughFIG. 14 j, many other variations and features are possible. When a book is finally selected for viewing thetitle page 886 will appear on the screen followed by a page of text. - The billing and collection system 278 (shown in
FIGS. 2 and 3 ) utilizes the latest technology in electronic transaction and telephone switching to track orders, authorize deliveries, bill consumers, and credit publishers automatically. The telephone calls initiated by thephone connector 270 are received by the billing andcollection system 278 which responds immediately without human intervention by placing the order and charging the consumers credit card account. Data is compiled periodically andpublishers 282 are credited for sales of their books or other text. The billing andcollection system 278 may also connect with subscribers through two-way cable connections, cellular, or other communication means. - It is preferred that the billing and
collection system 278 communicate with theoperations center 250 to track changes in available books and to provide statistical data to theoperations center 250. - The electronic book system can be modified to be used at public libraries, schools and bookstores.
FIG. 15 shows one possible arrangement of components for a public library, school or bookstore location. The main unit at a public library, school or bookstore is thefile server 900. Thefile server 900 is a large electronic memory unit that can store thousands of electronic books. Various electronic storage means may be used in the file servers, such as hard disks, read-write CD ROMs and read-only CD ROMs. - The system comprises five components; the
file server 900, a converter orvideo connector 904, acontroller 908, aviewer 912, and acatalog printer 916. The software for controlling the system is primarily located in thecontroller 908. The converter orvideo connector 904 is similar to those described above. In this configuration thecontroller unit 908 monitors the data being transferred to thefile server 900 by theconverter 904. Thecontroller 908 is preferably provided with a viewing screen and several control buttons. When it is necessary to have a larger screen to perform more sophisticated controlling of the system aviewer 266 may be connected to thecontroller 908 and the viewer screen and controls 740 may be used. - The
controller 908 is only able to download books topublic viewers 912 which are authorized to receive books from theparticular file server 900. For security reasons it is not desirable that thepublic viewer 912 have access to more than onefile server 900. In this way, security can be maintained over the text data for books. It is preferred that thepublic viewer 912 be limited to receiving one or two electronic books at a time from thecontroller 908. When the subscriber of thepublic viewer 912 needs a new or additional electronic book, the subscriber returns theviewer 912 to the school or public library where the subscriber receives a new electronic book from thecontroller 908. - In order to track the electronic books that are available on the
file server 900, the titles of the available books may be printed on acatalog printer 916. Thecatalog printer 916 is connected to thelibrary controller 908 and the titles of the electronic books are downloaded to thecatalog printer 916. None of the coded text for any of the electronic books can be printed using thecontroller 908 andcatalog printer 916 of this system. In order to maintain security over the data, none of the electronic book data is allowed to be downloaded to theprinter 916. Once a complete printout of available electronic book titles, magazines, or other textual material is complete, a hard copy of thecatalog 920 can be maintained at thefile server 900. - The system shown may also be used at bookstores. The bookstores can rent the
public viewer 912 to customers with the text for one or two electronic books loaded onto thepublic viewer 912. Thepublic viewer 912 may be provided with an automatic timeout sequence. The timeout sequence would erase the textual data for the books after a certain period of time, for example, two weeks. It is expected that after a period of time (perhaps within two weeks) the renter would return thepublic viewer 912 to the bookstore and receive additional electronic books for viewing. Using this arrangement, it is also possible for the bookstore to (permanently) sell aviewer 912 to a regular customer. The customer then returns to the bookstore from time to time to receive textual data for an electronic book which the customer can then store permanently on the customer'sown viewer 912. Various other configurations are possible for bookstores, schools and public libraries using thefile server 900 andpublic viewer 912 described. - Existing set top converters such as those made by Scientific Atlanta or General Instruments are presently unequipped to handle the
delivery system 200 of the present invention. Although set top converters may be built which include the library functions, hardware modifications are necessary in order to use thedelivery system 200 with existing set top converter technology. -
FIGS. 16 a and 16 b are examples of hardware modifications or upgrades. A port is used to attach hardware upgrades described below to a set top terminal. Two examples of upgrades to settop converters 601 to assist in receiving and selecting electronic books are shown. A menu generation card upgrade (FIG. 16 a) and an information download unit (FIG. 16 b). Each of these upgrades may be connected to the set top terminal unit through an upgrade port. A four wire cable, ribbon cable,IEEE 1394 firewire interface, USB interface, or the like may be used to connect the upgrade to the settop converter 601. - A
card addition 950 to aset top converter 601 is depicted inFIG. 16 a. Thecard 950 shown provides the additional functionality needed to utilize the book selection system with existing settop converter 601 technology. Thecard 950 may be configured to slip inside the frame of a set top terminal and become part of the set top terminal, an advanced set top terminal. The primary functions thecard 950 adds to the settop converter 601 are the interpreting of data signals, generating of menus, sequencing of menus, and, ultimately, the ability of the subscriber to select an electronic book using either the television or aviewer 266. Thecard 950 also provides a method for a remote location, such as the cable headend, to receive information on electronic books ordered. The electronic books ordered information and control commands may be passed from the cable headend to thecard 950 using telephone lines. - The primary components of the
card 950 are aPC chip CPU 952, a VGAgraphic controller 954, avideo combiner 956,logic circuitry 958,NTSC encoder 960, areceiver 962, demodulator (not shown), and adialer 611′. Thecard 950 operates by receiving the data text signal from the cable headend through the coaxial cable. Thelogic circuitry 958 of thecard 950 receivesdata 964,infrared commands 966, and synchronization signals (not shown) from the settop converter 601. Menu selections made by theviewer 266 on the remote control are received by the set top converter's 601 IR equipment and passed through to thecard 950. Thecard 950 interprets the ER signal and determines the electronic book (or menu) the subscriber has selected. Thecard 950 modifies the IR command to send the information to the settop converter 601. The modified ER command contains the channel information needed by the settop converter 601. Using thephone line 968 anddialer 611′, thecard 950 is able to transmit electronic books ordered information to the cable headend. It is also possible to receive the electronic books over the telephone lines and by-pass the video distribution system. In this embodiment, the telephone system may be used for example, to provide access to an Internet web site to order and receive electronic books. - These commands are passed through the interface linking the set top terminal's microprocessor with the microprocessor of the hardware upgrades. In this way, subscriber inputs, entered through the set top terminal keypad or remote control, can be transferred to any of the hardware upgrades for processing and responses generated therein can then be sent back to the set top terminal for display. In a preferred embodiment the IR commands 966 are transferred from set
top terminal 601 to hardware upgrade. - Hardware upgrades may include a microprocessor, interactive software, processing circuitry, bubble memory, and a long-term memory device. In addition to these basic components, the hardware upgrade may make use of an additional telephone modem or CD-ROM device.
- The information download hardware upgrade 1001 (shown in
FIG. 16 b) allows the subscriber to download large volumes of information from theoperations center 250 or cable headend using the settop converter 601. Thehardware upgrade 1001 will enable subscribers to download data, such as electronic books and magazines, to local storage. Primarily, thehardware upgrade 1001 is an additional local storage unit 1003 (e.g., hard disk, floppy, optical disk or magnetic cartridge and may include amicroprocessor 1005,instruction memory 1007, and arandom access memory 1009, as shown inFIG. 16 b). Preferably, a smallportable viewer 266 is also provided with theupgrade 1001 to enable downloaded text to be read without the use of a TV. - The downloadable information may be text or graphics supplied by the
operations center 250 or cable headend. With this upgrade, electronic books may be downloaded and read anywhere with theportable viewer 266. Using this upgrade, books may be downloaded and stored in compressed form for later decompression. The electronic books would be decompressed only at the time of viewing. Important text that the public desires immediate access may made available through this system. Text such as the President's speech, a new law, or a recent abortion decision rendered by the Supreme Court may be made immediately available. - In one embodiment, electronic book ordering information is stored at each set top terminal until it is polled by the cable headend using a polling request message format. An example of a polling request message format consists of six fields, namely: (1) a leading flag at the beginning of the message, (2) an address field, (3) a subscriber region designation, (4) a set top terminal identifier that includes a polling command/response (or P/F) bit, (5) an information field, and (6) a trailing flag at the end of the message. A similar response frame format for information communicated by the set top terminal to the cable headend in response to the polling request may be used.
-
FIG. 17 shows a preferred set top converter that includes adata receiver 617 and adata transmitter 1011. The data transmitter provides upstream data communications capability between the settop converter 601 and the cable headend. Upstream data transmissions are accomplished using the polling system described and, using adata transmitter 1011. Bothreceiver 617′ andtransmitter 1011 may be built into the settop converter 601 itself or added through an upgrade module. Regardless of the specific hardware configuration, the set top terminal's data transmission capabilities may be accomplished using the hardware shown inFIG. 17 , -
FIG. 17 shows RF signals, depicted as being received by adata receiver 617′ andtuner 613 working in unison. Both of these devices are interfaced with themicroprocessor 1013, which receivesinputs 1015, from the subscriber, either through a set top converter's keypad, a remote control unit or theviewer 266. All cable signals intended for reception on the subscriber's TV are accessed by thetuner 613 and subsequently processed by theprocessing circuitry 1017. Thisprocessing circuitry 1017 typically includes additional components (not shown) for descrambling, demodulation, volume control and remodulation on aChannel - Data targeted to individual set top converters is received by the
data receiver 617′ according to each set top converter's specific address or ID. In this way, each addressable set top converter only receives its own data. Thedata receiver 617′ may receive settop converter 601 specific data in the information field of the signal frame described or on a separate data carrier located at a convenient frequency in the incoming spectrum. - The received data includes information regarding electronic books and menus available for selection. The subscriber may enter a series of
commands 1015 using a keypad or remote control in order to choose an electronic book or menu. Upon receipt of such commands, themicroprocessor 1013 instructs the tuner to tune to the proper frequency of the channel carrying data and subsequently instructs theprocessing circuitry 1017 to begin descrambling of this data. - Upon selection of the electronic book, the
microprocessor 1013 stores any selection information in local memory (not shown) for later data transmission back to the cable headend. Themicroprocessor 1013 coordinates all CATV signal reception and also interacts with various upstream data transmission components. Typically, thedata transmitter 1011 operates in the return frequency band between 5 and 30 MHZ. In an alternative embodiment, the frequency band of 10 to 15 MHZ may be used. Regardless, however, of the frequency band used, thedata transmitter 1011 sends information to the cable headend in the information field of the response frame described. Those skilled in the art will recognize that a number of variations and combinations of the above-described set top terminal hardware components may be used to accomplish upstream data transmissions. - The
electronic book system 200 described may also be configured in a book-on-demand style.FIG. 18 a shows one example of a configuration for a books-on-demand system. A books-on-demand system requires more powerful two-way communications between the consumer's home, bookstore, school or public library and either theoperations center 250 or adistribution site 1020 such as the cable headend. This type of two-way communication can be provided by the hardware shown inFIG. 17 and described above. - Referring to
FIG. 18 a, in a books-on-demand system, the subscriber selects the electronic book to be download from an available menu of electronic books (see for exampleFIGS. 14 d and 14 e). The data for menus of available books is usually sent to the subscriber location by thedistribution site 1020. After the subscriber's menu selection, information about the subscriber selection (or request) is then communicated to either a distribution point 1020 (such as a cable headend or an Internet web site) or theoperations center 250. Upon receipt of this request, the needed textual and graphical information for the book is spooled and sent to the subscriber. In this manner, books are only sent when requested by the subscriber and are sent immediately upon demand for the book (or text). - In order to support such a books-on-demand system, the text delivery and distribution must be conducted on a strong nodal architectured distribution system, such as, a video-on-demand cable or telephone television system, an Internet web site, or through use of individual telephone access on the public telephone system.
- The books-on-demand system allows for a greater selection of electronic books to the subscriber and limits the amount of communicated book data that is unnecessary or unneeded. It also provides the electronic book to the subscriber in a much timelier fashion.
- In addition to a stronger distribution system, a books-on-demand system requires a
distribution point 1020 to have more sophisticated equipment to access and “spool out” the textual information. This can be accomplished usingfile server technology 1024 for storing the electronic books andATM 1028 or telephone-type switching (not shown) to distribute the textual information. Thefile server 1024 and distribution technology that can be used in configuring such a books-on-demand system is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,875 and U.S. Pat. No. 5,218,695, cited above. -
FIG. 18 a shows an embodiment for a books-on-demand system that utilizes file server technology. In addition to electronic books, the embodiment ofFIG. 18 a will support distribution of nearly any digital data. Electronic books or textual files are received frompublishers 282 and other sources throughlocal feeds 1032,ATM 1028, or bysatellite dish 1036. The data is then stored inmemory 1040 at thefile server 1024. Thedistribution point 1020 may be a cable headend that receives requests from subscribers and delivers text to subscribers over a two-way communication system (such as a video-on-demand system (VOD) 1044). Alternately, an Internet web site may serve as thedistribution point 1020. - The
library unit 262 can be connected to either a basic premium-typeservice cable system 1048, a near video-on-demand type cable system (or pay-per-view (PPV) 1052) or a video-on-demand cable system 1044. In connecting with either of these three systems thelibrary unit 262 may access the cable directly or may access the system through a settop terminal 601′, 601″, or 601″. - Using the two-way video-on-
demand system 1044, a subscriber is able to request a specific electronic book title and receive that text immediately following its request. To accomplish this, thedistribution point 1020 transmits a list of available electronic books through the cable delivery system to thelibrary unit 262. Thelibrary unit 262 displays the list of available electronic books on a menu or similar format. As described earlier, it is preferred that thelibrary unit 262 use menus which list categories of available electronic books to form its request from thedistribution point 1020. After selecting an electronic book, thelibrary unit 262 sends a request signal on the two-way communication system 1044 back to thedistribution point 1020. This request signal can be handled in two ways. Thelibrary unit 262 either initiates the request or thedistribution point 1020 polls the various libraries on the two-way system 1044. Upon receiving the request for the electronic book title, the text associated with that book title is transmitted to thelibrary unit 262 using the two-way cable system 1044. -
FIG. 18 b is an expanded view of apreferred operations center 250 that supports a regional or national books-on-demand system. In fact, theoperations center 250 shown supports distribution of nearly any digital data. Theoperations center 250 supports multiple feeds to receive digital information bytape ATM 1028, orsatellite 1036. The information is processed through aninput MUX 1064 and asmall file server 1068 before reaching themaster file server 1072. Digital data such as electronic books received frompublishers 282 is then stored on themaster file server 1072. It is preferred that the digital data is stored compressed in a standard format such as MPEG2. - A
system controller 1076 provides control over the regional or national books-on-demand system. Electronic books may be packaged into groups to provide feeds to various cable headends. In addition, scheduling and marketing research are conducted at theoperations center 250. In order to handle the scheduling and market research, electronic book buy data is received at theoperations center 250 through amultiplexer 1082. Electronic book buy information can be provided by theoperation center 250 to the billing andcollection system 278. - The
operations center 250 is also equipped to insert messages or advertisements into the file server. These messages or advertisements will eventually be received by the subscribers. - The
master file server 1072 uses anoutput multiplexer 1080 andATM 1028 as well as satellite connections to distribute digital data. In a preferred embodiment, cable headends receive text data on electronic books from themaster file server 1080 through theoutput multiplexer 1028 and anATM system 1028. After receiving the electronic book data, the cable headends store the books in alocal file server 1024.FIG. 18 a'sdistribution point 1020 is an example of a cable headend which may receive data from theoperations center 250 ofFIG. 18 b through anATM hookup 1088 or satellite hookup. - An electronic book may include various features for restricting access to text or other information contained within it. As discussed below, those features include restricting information in electronic books by user and content. Other features include restricting how a user may access pages of an electronic book based, for example, on page order, content, or time of viewing.
-
FIG. 19 is a diagram of amain menu 1100 for restricted access features for electronic books.Main menu 1100 may be displayed on theviewer 266 for permitting a user to select various options relating to restricting access to information in electronic books.Main menu 1100 has a number of sections for permitting the user to select the options by selecting an appropriate section. The term section refers to a definable portion of the screen, and the act of selecting a section may involve, for example, positioning the cursor or a pointer over thesection using trackball 743 anddepressing selection buttons 745 to “click on” the section; other cursor-control devices, including peripheral devices, may be used to select a section either by positioning the cursor or entering a particular command The sections inmain menu 1100, and other described screens, may alternatively have different shapes and may be displayed in a different configuration than that shown. In addition, the screens may have more or fewer sections depending upon, for example, desired functions or displayed information. Also,main menu 1100 and the other described screens may be generated for display on theviewer 266, or retrieved from memory for display, bylibrary processor 628 operating under control of software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 or byviewer processor 621 operating under control of software modules residing within theinstruction memory 732, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. - A
view book section 1102 permits a user to select an option to view one of the electronic books stored within theviewer 266 orlibrary 262. An enterbook ratings section 1104 permits a user to select an option to enter ratings for the stored electronic books in order to control access to the electronic books. A rating or book rating is any type of information used to control or restrict access to content of an electronic book. Also, ratings may include a range of ratings, and the range of ratings may have associated support levels indicating multiple levels of access such as those provided by the following standard film ratings: G; PG; PG-13; R; and NC-17. An access levels andviewer mode section 1106 permits a user to select an option to enter access levels for users in order to control the users' access to the stored electronic books. This option also permits a particular user to set the operating mode of theviewer 266. Access levels or user access levels are any type of information used to restrict or control particular users' access to content of electronic books. An operating or viewer mode is a particular way in which a viewer restricts or controls access to content of electronic books. It may, for example, restrict access by user access levels, book ratings, a combination of access levels and book ratings, or according to another methodology. -
Sections book view section 1108 permits a user to select a page-based book view option, which refers to a feature requiring that pages of an electronic book be viewed in a particular order. A content-basedbook view section 1110 permits a user to select a content-based book view option, which refers to a feature requiring that portions of a particular page of an electronic book be selected in a particular order before viewing a next page in the electronic book. A time-basedbook view section 1112 permits a user to select a time-based book view option, which refers to a feature requiring that a page of an electronic book be viewed for a particular amount of time before viewing a next page in the electronic book. -
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of amain menu process 1120 for processing a user's selection of various sections inmain menu 1100.Main menu process 1120 may be implemented within theviewer 266, thelibrary 262, or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 for execution by thelibrary processor 628 or within theinstruction memory 732 for execution by theviewer processor 621, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. Inprocess 1120, a displaymain menu process 1122 displays amain menu 1100 on theviewer 266. A select option process 1124 waits for a user to select one of the sections within amain menu 1100. Upon a user selecting a section in order to choose an option, anoption process 1126 selects an appropriate routine based upon the user's selected option. If the user selected theview book section 1102, aview book process 1128 executes aview book routine 1130. If the user selected thebook ratings section 1104, abook ratings process 1132 executes a book ratings routine 1134. If the user selected access levels andviewer mode section 1106, an access levels andviewer mode process 1136 executes an access levels routine 1138. - If the user selected the page-based
book view section 1108, a display page-basedbook view process 1140 executes a page-basedbook view routine 1142. If the user selected the content-basedbook view section 1110, a display content-based book view process executes a content-basedbook view routine 1146. If the user selected the time basedbook view section 1112, a display time-basedbook view process 1148 executes a time-basedbook view routine 1150. - After executing the appropriate routine based upon the user's selection, a
decision process 1152 determines if the user has selected another section in themain menu 1100. If so, theoption process 1126 is repeated to process the next selected option. -
FIGS. 21A and 21B are flow charts ofview book routine 1130. Theview book routine 1130 may comprise software modules stored in a memory, such as theinstruction memory 732 of the viewer 266 (seeFIG. 11 ). Theprocessor 621 then executes theview book routine 1130. Theview book routine 1130 includes a viewer mode routine (or module) 1162 to determine the operating mode of theviewer 266. Theviewer 266 may operate in a number of different modes, as set by a particular user or determined by default. For example, a userlevel mode module 1164 permits access based upon a particular access level assigned to each user and ratings assigned to the stored electronic books. A bookrating mode module 1165 permits access based solely upon the ratings assigned to the stored electronic books. Alternatively, a user may operate theviewer 266 in neither the user level or book rating modes, shown as an unlimitedaccess mode module 1163, which effectively disables the restricted access features. Other modes or default modes are possible for use with restricted access features. Theprocessor 621, using theviewer mode module 1162 determines if theviewer 266 is operating in theuser level mode 1164, thebook rating mode 1165, theunlimited access mode 1163, or another mode. If operating in theuser level mode 1164, a displayname screen module 1166 displays a screen requesting a user's name or other identifier.FIG. 22 illustrates an example of aname screen 1210 for display on theviewer 266 and including a name section 1212 for the user to enter a name or other identifier. - The
processor 621 uses aname process module 1168 to receive the user's entered name or identifier. Anaccess module 1170 determines the user's permitted access, which it may accomplish by retrieving from a database an access level assigned to the user. The database, stored for example in theinstruction memory unit 632 or within theinstruction memory 732, may include a table cross-referencing user names or identifiers with access levels. Table 1 illustrates an example of access levels one (1) through n and books rates l, m, and n. -
TABLE 1 user access identifier level meaning user1 1 access to all electronic books user2 2 access to no electronic books user3 3 ©48 access to electronic books rated 1-m . . . userN N access to electronic books rated m-n - A
display module 1172 displays a listing of the stored electronic books or a subset of them that are available to the users based on their entered user identifiers.FIG. 23 illustrates a select abook screen 1220 for display on theviewer 266 and includingsections electronic books - Returning to
FIG. 21A , arequest module 1174 receives the user's selection of a requested electronic book. The user may choose an electronic book for viewing by positioning the cursor on one of thesections book screen 1220 and selecting a desired section on screen, or by entering a particular command using a keyboard or other peripheral device. The processor, using arating module 1176 then retrieves the rating information for the selected electronic book and compares the information with the user's permitted access. - The rating information may be stored within a header file for each electronic book. The information contained in the header file may be used to identify and categorize each electronic book for display and for other purposes, such as associating a rating with the electronic book or for searching. As new electronic books are stored on the
viewer 266 orlibrary unit 262, this header information may be extracted from the header file and stored in a database resident on theviewer 266 orlibrary unit 262, such as inmemory - The header file may contain a rating field for storing ratings or rating information for the corresponding electronic book. The header file may also contain other fields relevant to controlling access to electronic books. The header file may include a restricted version field to identify whether the corresponding electronic book is a restricted or unrestricted version; a page-based book view field to identify information for use in determining the particular order of pages for the page-based book view option; a content-based book view field to identify information for use in determining the particular order of sections for the content-based book view option; and a time-based book view field to identify information for use in determining the particular time of viewing pages for the time-based book view option.
-
TABLE 2 Title: Authors: Primary Author: Author 2: Author 3: Author 4: Author 5: ISBN #: Library of Congress # (LC#) Dewey Decimal Classification # (DDC#) Publisher: Edition Number: Date of Publishing: Related Categories: Category 1Category 6Category 2Category 7Category 3Category 8Category 4Category 9Category 5Category 10 Related Keywords: Keyword 1Keyword 6Keyword 2Keyword 7Keyword 3Keyword 8Keyword 4Keyword 9Keyword 5Keyword 10 User Defined Criteria 1: User Defined Criteria 2: User Defined Criteria 3: User Defined Criteria 4: User Defined Criteria 5: Book Summary/Description: User Entered Notes: Rating: Restricted Version: Page-Based Book View: Content-Based Book View: Time-Based Book View: - Using a
decision module 1178, theprocessor 621 determines if the user is permitted access to the selected electronic book. It may make this determination by comparing the retrieved rating for the requested electronic book with the permitted access for the user's access level, as shown for example in Table 1. If no access is permitted, theprocessor 621 uses adisplay module 1180 and displays an access denied message.FIG. 24 illustrates an access deniedscreen 1230 for display on theviewer 266 and for displaying an access deniedmessage 1232. Otherwise, if the user is permitted access, theprocessor 621 uses anopen module 1182 to open and display the requested electronic book, and adisplay module 1184 to display pages of the electronic book as requested by the user. -
FIG. 25 illustrates abook access screen 1240 displaying acover page 1242 of a requested electronic book to which access is permitted. Thebook access screen 1240 also displays apage forward button 1244 and a pagebackward button 1246 to permit a user to page forward and backward, respectively, in the displayed electronic book by selecting the appropriate button. Theprocessor 621 uses adecision module 1186 to determine if the user has closed the displayed electronic book and, if so, routine 1130 returns to displaymodule 1172 to display the listing of the stored electronic books in the select abook screen 1220. A user may close a displayed electronic book by selecting an icon displayed on the screen, for example, or by entering, using a keyboard or other device, a particular command. - If the
viewer 266 is in thebook rating mode 1165, theprocessor 621, using adisplay module 1188, displays the listing of electronic books, as illustrated in the select abook screen 1220. Using arequest module 1190, theprocessor 621 receives a user's requested electronic book, and with arating module 1192, retrieves rating information for the requested electronic book and compares the rating information with the viewer access level. Theprocessor 621 next uses adecision module 1194 to determine if access to the requested electronic book is permitted by determining, for example, if the rating for the requested electronic book is within the range of ratings for which access is permitted for the particular viewer mode. If not, using adisplay module 1196, theprocessor 621 may display an access denied message, as illustrated in the access deniedscreen 1230. Otherwise, if access is permitted, theprocessor 621 uses anopen module 1198 to open and display the requested electronic book, and adisplay process 1200 to display pages of the electronic book as requested by the user, as illustrated in thebook access screen 1240. Using a decision module 1202, theprocessor 621 determines if the user closes the displayed electronic book. If so, theview book routine 1130 returns to adisplay module 1188 to display the listing of electronic books on the select abook screen 1220. The access levels may be assigned, for example, locally by a particular user or by a supplier or distributor upon sale of an electronic book or providing a subscription to one. - If the
viewer 266 is in theunlimited access mode 1163, theprocessor 621 uses adisplay module 1167 to display a listing of the stored electronic books or a sub-set of stored electronic books that are available to the user based on the entered user identifier.FIG. 23 illustrates the select abook screen 1220 for display on theviewer 266 and includes name sections identifying stored electronic books. Returning toFIG. 21 , theprocessor 621 uses arequest module 1169 to receive the user's selection of a requested electronic book. The user may choose an electronic book for viewing by positioning the cursor on a section identifying the desired electronic book on the select abook screen 1220 and selecting the action denied section, or by entering a particular command using a keyboard or other device. Theprocessor 621 then uses anopen module 1171 to open and display the requested electronic book, and adisplay module 1173 to display pages of the electronic book as requested by the user. -
FIG. 25 illustrates abook access screen 1240 displaying acover page 1242 of a requested electronic book to which access is permitted. Thebook access screen 1240 also displays apage forward button 1244 and a pagebackward button 1246 to permit a user to page forward and backward, respectively, in the displayed electronic book by selecting the appropriate button. Theprocessor 621 uses adecision module 1186 to determine if the user has closed the displayed electronic book and, if so, routine 1130 returns to displaymodule 1175 to display the listing of the stored electronic books in the select abook screen 1220. A user may close a displayed electronic book by selecting an icon displayed on the screen, for example, or by entering, using a keyboard or other device, a particular command. -
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of a book ratings routine 1134. The book ratings routine 1134 may be implemented within theviewer 266, thelibrary 262, or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 for execution by thelibrary processor 628 or within theinstruction memory 732 for execution by theviewer processor 621, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. In the book ratings routine 1134, theprocessor 621 uses a name/password module 1252 to display a name and password screen for permitting a particular user to enter a name or other identifier for a user and a corresponding password. The password may include an alphanumeric string or any type of information used to verify a user's identity. The particular user has the ability to enter and change user access levels and book ratings. -
FIG. 27 illustrates apassword screen 1270 for display on theviewer 266 and having name andpassword sections module 1254, theprocessor 621 receives the user's entered name or other identifier and the user's corresponding password. Theprocessor 621 then uses a comparemodule 1256 to compare the user's entered password with stored access information relating to rating of the stored electronic books. The processor 622 uses adecision module 1258 to determine if the user is permitted to enter book ratings by, for example, determining if the user's name and password matches the stored access information. If not, using adisplay module 1268, theprocessor 621 displays an access denied message, as illustrated inFIG. 24 . - If the user is permitted access, the
processor 621, usingdisplay module 1260, displays a book ratings menu.FIG. 28 illustrates a book ratings screen 1280 for display on theviewer 266 that permits a user to enter ratings for stored electronic books. - The book ratings screen 1280 displays
book sections 1282, 1284 and 1286 that list electronic books 1-N. associated with each of the book sections is one of arating section - Returning to
FIG. 26 , theprocessor 621 uses a receivemodule 1262 to receive the user's entered rating information for the stored electronic books and implements the rating information. Theviewer 266 orlibrary unit 262 may store the rating information in a database structure, such as a table, for later access and retrieval. The rating information may relate to a content of a corresponding electronic book by, for example, indicating restriction of particular content, a particular type of content, a particular portion of the content, or another type of restriction. Theprocessor 621 then uses a receivestandard ratings module 1263 to optionally receive and implement standard ratings, the implementation of which depends upon the particular standard; the standard ratings may be entered by a user or may be predetermined by, for example, a publisher or an operations center. - Using a
decision module 1264 theprocessor 621 determines if the user closes thebook ratings screen 1280. If not, the book ratings routine 1134 may continue to receive rating information. If the user did close thebook ratings screen 1280, a return module 1266 is used to return to the main menu and display themain menu screen 1100. The phrase close a screen or close screen refers to removing from display information displayed on a screen of the viewer, and a user may close a screen by selecting an icon displayed on the screen, for example, or by entering via a keyboard or other device a particular command. -
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of implementratings module 1262, including examples of various ways in which the user may restrict access to the stored electronic books. In the implementratings module 1262, theprocessor 621 uses a receivemodule 1302 to receive the user's identification of an electronic book to rate, which may be accomplished by determining which section the user selected in the book ratings screen 1280 or by determining in which corresponding section a user entered a rating inscreen 1280. Using adisplay ratings module 1304, theprocessor 621 may display rating options, if desired by a user, and rating options may be implemented by using rating numbers or characters to determine the type of rating. Alternatively, theprocessor 621 may present another screen with rating options or present such options within separate sections of thebook ratings screen 1280. Next, theprocessor 621 uses a receivemodule 1306 to receive and process the user's requested type of rating. If the user requested restriction of specific content, as determined using thespecific content module 1308, a receivecontent module 1310 is used to display a text screen for displaying pages of an electronic book to a user and for permitting a user to identify information to restrict. The receivecontent module 1310 is also used to receive an identification of content to restrict. A text screen, examples of which are provided inFIGS. 30 a-30 f, is a screen displaying a page of an electronic book, the page having information possibly including text, graphics, images, video, or other information capable of visual display. A receiverating module 1312 is used to receive a rating for the restricted content, and asave module 1314 is used to save the entered rating in the header file for the electronic book and restricts the identified content. - If the user requested restriction of specific pages, as determined by the
processor 621 usingpage restriction module 1316, a receivemodule 1318 is used to receive identification of pages to restrict, as entered in, for example, insection 1294 of thebook ratings screen 1280. A receiverating module 1320 is used to receive a rating for the restricted pages, and asave module 1322 is used to save the rating in the header file for the electronic book and restricts the identified pages. - If the user requested restriction of images, as determined during execution of an
images module 1324, a receivemodule 1326 is used to receive a rating for the restricted images, and asave module 1328 is used to save the rating in the header file for the electronic book and restricts the images. - If the user requested restriction of the entire content of an electronic book, as determined by the
processor 621 using anentire book module 1330, a receivemodule 1332 is used to receive a rating for the restriction, and asave module 1334 is used to save the entered rating in the header file for the electronic book. - Table 3 provides an example of rating options and particular ratings, if the rating options are determined by characters or numbers entered in the
ratings sections FIG. 28 . In Table 3, a user would enter a number, for example, as the particular ratings m, n, o, and p. Alternatively, default ratings may be used, as determined for example of different characters or symbols identifying rating options and as further illustrated in Table 3. Theviewer 266 may store the entered type of ratings and particular ratings for each electronic book in the header file for each electronic book or in a database table or another type of structure in theinstruction memory unit 632 or within theinstruction memory 732 to cross-reference the ratings with the electronic books. Ratings may also be based upon standard ratings such as those used in conjunction with the device known as the v-chip, or any type of ratings pre-assigned to the electronic books by, for example, a publisher. -
TABLE 3 rating meaning C-m restrict by content, rating m applied to restricted content P-n restrict pages entered in section 1294, rating n applied to restrictedpages I-o restrict images, rating o applied to the images B-p restrict entire content of the book, rating p applied to the book . . . C-d restrict by content, default rating applied to restricted content P-d restrict pages entered in section 1294, default rating applied torestricted pages I-d restrict images, default rating applied to the images B-d restrict entire content of the book, default rating applied to the book - Returning to
FIG. 29 , upon completion of restricting access to a particular electronic book, adecision process module 1336 is used to determine if the user has selected another electronic book to rate. If so, the implementratings module 1262 returns to the receivemodule 1302 for theprocessor 621 to perform the processes for restricting and rating the next selected electronic book. -
FIGS. 30 a-30 f are diagrams of screens for display on theviewer 266 to illustrate in conjunction with implementratings module 1262 different ways in which a particular user may restrict access to electronic books.FIG. 30 a is a diagram of apage text screen 1340, which theviewer 266 may display upon a user requesting restriction of specific content. A restrictsection 1341 permits a user to restrict selected content, and selection ofpage turn sections FIG. 30 b is a diagram ofpage text screen 1340 with selectedtext 1342 to be restricted. Upon a user selecting restrictsection 1341, theviewer 266 restricts access to the selected text.FIG. 30 c is a diagram ofpage text screen 1340 with restrictedtext section 1344, illustrating removal of the restricted text when viewed by a user who does not have an access level permitting viewing of the restricted text. -
FIG. 30 d is a diagram of a page text and graphics screen 1346 illustrating animage 1348 within a displayed page of an electronic book. A user may restrict the image by selecting the image, as indicated inFIG. 30 e illustrating image 1350 having a different shaded background to indicate its selection. Upon selecting restrictsection 1341, theviewer 266 restricts access to the image, andFIG. 30 f illustrates removal of the image to display a restrictedportion 1352 when viewed by a user who does not have an access level permitting viewing of the restricted image. - For restriction of particular content, as opposed to an entire book, such as the restriction by specific content (module 1308), page (module 1316), or images (module 1324), in one embodiment the
viewer 266 restricts the particular content by saving another version of the restricted electronic book with the restricted portions deleted. Therefore, theviewer 266 may store two versions of the same electronic book for restricting access. A first version is the original version, such as that received from a publisher, and includes all content. A second version has all restricted content deleted, such as described with respect toFIGS. 30 a-30 d. The header file for each electronic book may use the restricted version field to identify whether the corresponding book is the first (unrestricted) or second (restricted) version, and the restricted version field may also, if desired or necessary, cross-reference the two versions. -
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of an access levels routine 1138. The access levels routine 1138 may be implemented within theviewer 266, thelibrary 262, or a combination; for example, the access levels routine 1138 may be implemented by software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 for execution by thelibrary processor 628 or within theinstruction memory 732 for execution by theviewer processor 621, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. In the access levels routine 1138, a display name/password module 1362 is used to display thepassword screen 1270 permitting a user to enter a name or other identifier and a corresponding password. A receivemodule 1364 is used to receive the user's entered name or other identifier and entered password. An electronic book viewer, such as theviewer 266, may contain identification of a default user and password, allowing for initial set-up of additional users and their associated access levels by entering the default information using thepassword screen 1270 and the receivemodule 1364. The default user and password information may be pre-assigned and subsequently provided to a particular user. A comparemodule 1366 is used to compare the password with stored access information related to assigning access levels to users. Adecision module 1368 is used to determine if the particular user is permitted to enter access levels for other users, typically determined by whether the password matches the stored access information. If not, adisplay module 1370 is used to displays an access denied message, as illustrated in the access deniedscreen 1230. - Otherwise, if the user is permitted access, a
display module 1372 is used to display a user access levels/viewer mode screen.FIG. 32 illustrates an access levels/viewer mode screen 1400 for display on theviewer 266. Thescreen 1400 includes anaccess levels section 1401 permitting the user to enter access levels for other users. Thescreen 1400 includesname sections sections viewer mode section 1403 permits the user to enter a mode for theviewer 266. By selecting useraccess level section 1414, the user may set theviewer 266 in a mode to restrict access by both user access levels and book ratings. By selecting vieweraccess level section 1416, the user may restrict access based solely on the book ratings and may enter a particular level insection 1418 to control the level of restriction. - Table 4 provides an example of electronic books that a user may access based upon a particular viewer access level entered in
section 1418 while in the viewer mode. The viewer mode restricts access to the stored electronic books based upon a rating for each electronic book. A user may enter the parameters r, s, t, and u, or they may be predetermined or established, for example, by a publisher. -
TABLE 4 viewer electronic books access level that may be accessed 1 no electronic books 2 all electronic books 3 only electronic books rated l-s . . . r only electronic books rated t-u - Returning to
FIG. 31 , a receiveidentification module 1374 is used to receive identifications of users, if necessary, inscreen 1400. A receiveaccess levels module 1376 is used to receive access levels entered in, for example, access levels sections 1408, 1410, and 1412. An associateaccess levels module 1378 is used to associate the entered access levels with the corresponding users and saves such information in a database structure, such as shown in Table 1, for later access and retrieval. Adecision module 1380 is used to determine if a viewer mode has been entered inviewer mode section 1403. If not, adefault module 1382 is used to set a default mode. A default mode may be predetermined and stored in theviewer 266, or determined and entered by a user. Otherwise, adecision module 1384 is used to determine if the user has entered a viewer mode based upon access levels by selecting useraccess levels section 1414. If not, a receivemodule 1386 is used to receive a viewer access level insection 1418, and asave module 1390 is used to save the entered level. A saveview mode module 1388 is used to save the viewer mode, in this example either a mode based upon user access levels and book ratings (user access level mode) or based solely upon book ratings (viewer access level mode), or neither of those modes. - A
decision module 1392 is used to determine if the user closesscreen 1400. If not, the routine 1138 may continue to receive access levels and viewer modes. If the user doesclose screen 1400, areturn module 1394 is used to return to the main menu to displaymain menu screen 1100. -
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of page-basedbook view routine 1142. The page-basedbook view routine 1142 may be implemented within theviewer 266, thelibrary 262, or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 for execution by thelibrary processor 628 or within theinstruction memory 732 for execution by theviewer processor 621, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. In the page-basedbook view routine 1142, adisplay module 1422 is used to display an electronic book.FIG. 34 illustrates atext screen 1425 for display on theviewer 266 for the page-basedbook view routine 1142. Thetext screen 1425 displays a page of an electronic book, and it includes anext page section 1427 for selection by a user to select the next page of the displayed electronic book. - A
request module 1424 is used to receive a user's request for a next page, such as by the user selectingnext page section 1427. Alternatively, a user may be required to perform a predefined action such as taking an interactive quiz, prior to being allowed to move to the next page. Adecision module 1426 is used to determine if an end of the electronic book is displayed. If so, areturn module 1430 is used to return to the main menu to displaymain menu screen 1100. If the end of the electronic book is not displayed, adisplay module 1428 is used to display only the next page of a particular order of pages of the electronic book. Theviewer 266 may store a particular order for the pages, such as a sequential order, and therefore require that the user view the pages in sequential order. Other orders of pages may similarly be saved. In addition, the particular order may be changed by a user to re-order the pages for a subsequent page-based book view, and different stored electronic books may have different associated page orders for viewing them in the page-based book view mode. The particular order may be stored in the page-based book view field in the header file for each electronic book, or it may be stored elsewhere and referenced by information in the page-based book view field. -
FIG. 35 is a flow chart of content-basedbook view routine 1146. The content-basedbook view routine 1146 may be implemented within theviewer 266, thelibrary 262, or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 for execution by thelibrary processor 628 or within theinstruction memory 732 for execution by theviewer processor 621, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. In content-basedbook view routine 1146, adisplay module 1442 is used to display a page of an electronic book having particular sections.FIG. 36 illustrates acontent restriction screen 1460 for display on theviewer 266 and havingsections book view routine 1196 restricts access to the electronic book displayed inscreen 1460 by displaying the next or another page only when the user selects the sections in a particular order, in this example, in numerical order. Other types of restriction are possible for teaching or other purposes. For example, an electronic book used for teaching mathematics could include a page or pages with example problems of increasing difficulty. Associated with each problem could be a model answer. The user's access to the problems may be restricted, using the routine 1146, such that the user is provided access to a subsequent problem only after first successfully answering a prior problem. - The
viewer 266 may store a table or other database structure cross-referencing each page of an electronic book with a selection order for the sections on each page. The header file for each electronic book may store that information in the content-based book view field, or the content-based book view field may include a reference to the information stored elsewhere. Theviewer 266 can retrieve that information in order to compare the user's selection with the stored selection to determine whether to display the next page. Table 5 provides an example of an order of selection for an electronic book displayed on the content restrictions screen 1460 and possibly having other pages. As shown in Table 5, each page may have its own particular selection order in which the displayed sections must be selected to view the next page, and each page may also instruct the user to select the displayed sections in a particular order, for example, sequential, reverse sequential, only the odd numbered sections, or only the even numbered sections. In addition, the listing of the pages in the table may identify the order in which the pages are to be displayed; alternatively, theviewer 266 may permit the user to view any other page after selecting the sections on a displayed page in the particular order. -
TABLE 5 pages election order for sections 1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 2 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 3 1, 3, 5 4 2, 4, 6 . . . m m1, m2, . . . mn - The
processor 621 uses a receiveprocess 1444 receives the user's selection of the sections in the displayed page of the electronic book. Adecision module 1446 is used to determine if the selection satisfies particular criteria relating to the restricted access. If not, amessage module 1448 may be used to display a request for the user to reselect the portions. If the selection does satisfy the criteria, adecision module 1450 is used to determine if the end of the electronic book is displayed. If not, a retrievemodule 1452 may be used to retrieve the next page of the particular order of pages and returns to displaymodule 1442 to display that page. The next displayed page may also have sections that must be selected in a particular order to again advance to the next page. If the end of the book is displayed, areturn module 1454 may be used to return to the main menu to displayscreen 1100. -
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of a time-basedbook view routine 1150. The time-basedbook view routine 1150 may be implemented within theviewer 266, thelibrary 262, or a combination; for example, it may be implemented by software modules residing within theinstruction memory unit 632 for execution by thelibrary processor 628 or within theinstruction memory 732 for execution by theviewer processor 621, or by hardware modules, or a combination of hardware and software modules. This routine requires that the user view each page of a displayed electronic book for a particular time period before theviewer 266 will display the next page. In the time-basedbook view routine 1150, adisplay module 1482 may be used to display a page of an electronic book, for example, as shown intext screen 1425. Arequest module 1484 may be used to receive a requested next page from a user. In response, adecision module 1490 may be used to determine if the end of the book is displayed and, if so, areturn module 1492 may be used to return to the main menu to displayscreen 1100. - If the end of the electronic book is not displayed, a
decision module 1488 is used to determine if a particular amount of time has elapsed since displaying the current page. Theviewer 266 orlibrary unit 262 may include an internal timer, such as a timer provided by theviewer processor 621 or thelibrary processor 628, triggered by a page selection in order to determine if the particular amount of time has elapsed. The particular amount of time may be predetermined or entered by a particular user, and it may be stored in the time-based book view field of the header file for the corresponding book or referenced by information in the time-based book view field. In addition, each page may include the same amount of particular time for viewing or varying amounts of time. - Table 6 is an example of a table providing viewing times for pages of a particular electronic book. Upon display of a particular page by the
viewer 266, it may retrieve the corresponding viewing time for that page from the appropriate table or other database structure and also trigger a timer, or obtain a time stamp or time information from a running timer. The viewing time information may be stored in the time-based book view field for the corresponding electronic book, or it may be stored elsewhere and referenced by information in the time-based book view field. In addition, the listing of pages in the table may identify the order in which the pages are displayed. - When another page is requested, the
viewer 266 may obtain another time stamp or time information from the timer and compare it with the previous time stamp or time information to determine an amount of elapsed time since the current page was first displayed. If a sufficient amount of time has elapsed, adisplay module 1486 may be used to display the next page of a particular order of the pages, such as a sequential order. Otherwise, if a sufficient amount of time has not elapsed, routine 1150 continues displaying the current page. -
TABLE 6 page viewing time 1 2 minutes 2 1.75 minutes 3 1.5 minutes . . . m n minutes - The time-based
book view routine 1150 may be incorporated into the viewer software to control access to specific book content. For example, if an electronic book includes a page bearing an advertisement, the routine 1150 could prevent that page from being turned until a sufficient time has elapsed to ensure the user has at least had an opportunity to view the advertisement. In another alternative use, the routine 1150 could be used in a school text book to require pages to be turned at a rate set by a teacher, or programmed into the electronic book. In these alternatives, a warning may be provided that an allowed time for viewing has elapsed, prior to a page being turned by theprocessor 621. - While this invention has been described in conjunction with the embodiments described above, it is evident that many alterations, modifications and variations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Accordingly, embodiments of the invention as set forth above are intended to be only illustrative. Various changes may be made without departing from the scope of the invention as defined in the following claims and their equivalents.
Claims (13)
1-17. (canceled)
18. A method for controlling access to electronic books displayed on a viewer, comprising:
displaying a portion of an electronic book on a viewer, the electronic book having a series of pages arranged in a particular order;
receiving information relating to access of the electronic book by potential users; and
permitting, based upon the information, viewing of the pages only in the particular order.
19. The method of claim 18 , wherein the permitting step includes permitting viewing of the pages only in sequential order.
20. The method of claim 18 , wherein the permitting step includes permitting viewing of the pages based upon a particular time period of viewing at least one of the pages.
21. The method of claim 18 , wherein the permitting step includes permitting viewing of the pages based upon user-entered information.
22. A method for controlling access to an electronic book displayed on a viewer, comprising:
displaying a portion of an electronic book on a viewer, the electronic book having a series of pages arranged in a particular order and each of the pages having a plurality of sections;
receiving information relating to access of the electronic book by a user; and
permitting, based upon the information, viewing of the pages only in the particular order and permitting the user to view a next page within the particular order only upon selection of the sections on each page in an order assigned to each page.
23-41. (canceled)
42. An apparatus for controlling access to electronic books displayed on a viewer, comprising:
a display that displays a portion of an electronic book on a viewer, the electronic book having a series of pages arranged in a particular order;
a receiving module that receives information relating to access of the electronic book by potential users; and
a permitting module that permits, based upon the information, viewing of the pages only in the particular order.
43. The apparatus of claim 42 , wherein the permitting module includes a module that permits viewing of the pages only in sequential order.
44. The apparatus of claim 42 , wherein the permitting module includes a module that permits viewing of the pages based upon a particular time period of viewing at least one of the pages.
45. The apparatus of claim 42 , wherein the permitting module includes a viewing module that permits viewing of the pages based upon user-entered information.
46. An apparatus for controlling access to an electronic book displayed on a viewer, comprising:
a display that displays a portion of an electronic book on a viewer, the electronic book having a series of pages arranged in a particular order and each of the pages having a plurality of sections;
a receiving module that receives information relating to access of the electronic book by a user; and
a viewing module that permits, based upon the information, viewing of the pages only in the particular order and permitting the user to view a next page within the particular order only upon selection of the sections on each page in an order assigned to each page.
47-53. (canceled)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/335,432 US20120179962A1 (en) | 1999-06-25 | 2011-12-22 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US09/344,492 US8095949B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 1999-06-25 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
US13/335,432 US20120179962A1 (en) | 1999-06-25 | 2011-12-22 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/344,492 Division US8095949B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 1999-06-25 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20120179962A1 true US20120179962A1 (en) | 2012-07-12 |
Family
ID=46456174
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/344,492 Expired - Fee Related US8095949B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 1999-06-25 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
US13/335,432 Abandoned US20120179962A1 (en) | 1999-06-25 | 2011-12-22 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/344,492 Expired - Fee Related US8095949B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 1999-06-25 | Electronic book with restricted access features |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US8095949B1 (en) |
Cited By (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20090307078A1 (en) * | 2002-02-27 | 2009-12-10 | Ashish K Mithal | Method and system for facilitating search, selection, preview, purchase evaluation, offering for sale, distribution and/or sale of digital content and enhancing the security thereof |
US20120030756A1 (en) * | 2010-07-29 | 2012-02-02 | Bank Of America Corporation | User Permissions In Computing Systems |
US20120089938A1 (en) * | 2010-10-08 | 2012-04-12 | Fuminori Homma | Information Processing Apparatus, Information Processing Method, and Program |
US20140089815A1 (en) * | 2012-09-21 | 2014-03-27 | Google Inc. | Sharing Content-Synchronized Ratings |
USD771673S1 (en) * | 2015-05-21 | 2016-11-15 | Layer3 TV, Inc. | Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface |
US9800566B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2017-10-24 | Sony Corporation | Method of using server, server reservation control apparatus and program storage medium |
Families Citing this family (32)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7664263B2 (en) | 1998-03-24 | 2010-02-16 | Moskowitz Scott A | Method for combining transfer functions with predetermined key creation |
US6205249B1 (en) | 1998-04-02 | 2001-03-20 | Scott A. Moskowitz | Multiple transform utilization and applications for secure digital watermarking |
US7159116B2 (en) | 1999-12-07 | 2007-01-02 | Blue Spike, Inc. | Systems, methods and devices for trusted transactions |
US7177429B2 (en) | 2000-12-07 | 2007-02-13 | Blue Spike, Inc. | System and methods for permitting open access to data objects and for securing data within the data objects |
US7664264B2 (en) | 1999-03-24 | 2010-02-16 | Blue Spike, Inc. | Utilizing data reduction in steganographic and cryptographic systems |
US7475246B1 (en) * | 1999-08-04 | 2009-01-06 | Blue Spike, Inc. | Secure personal content server |
US7954121B2 (en) * | 2001-06-19 | 2011-05-31 | Jlb Ventures Llc | Methods and system for controlling access to individual titles |
US8191092B2 (en) * | 2001-06-19 | 2012-05-29 | Jlb Ventures Llc | Method and system for replacing/obscuring titles and descriptions of recorded content |
US7287275B2 (en) | 2002-04-17 | 2007-10-23 | Moskowitz Scott A | Methods, systems and devices for packet watermarking and efficient provisioning of bandwidth |
US8184326B2 (en) * | 2005-06-22 | 2012-05-22 | Xerox Corpoaration | Information dissemination multifunction device |
US7702781B2 (en) * | 2006-03-03 | 2010-04-20 | Teoco Corporation | System and method of storing data files at a remote storage facility |
US8352876B2 (en) * | 2007-02-21 | 2013-01-08 | University Of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. | Interactive electronic book operating systems and methods |
JP5164673B2 (en) * | 2008-05-30 | 2013-03-21 | キヤノン株式会社 | Server apparatus, catalog processing method and program |
US8371855B1 (en) * | 2008-09-30 | 2013-02-12 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Sharing electronic books |
US9064424B2 (en) * | 2009-02-20 | 2015-06-23 | Jackson Fish Market, LLC | Audiovisual record of a user reading a book aloud for playback with a virtual book |
US20120110476A1 (en) * | 2010-11-02 | 2012-05-03 | Qiuhang Richard Qian | My online 3D E library |
CA2853856A1 (en) * | 2010-11-25 | 2012-05-31 | Kobo Inc. | Systems and methods for managing a profile of a user accessing electronic content |
US20120196577A1 (en) * | 2011-01-28 | 2012-08-02 | Learning Monitoring Limited | Systems and methods for monitoring book-related activities |
KR101096821B1 (en) * | 2011-05-17 | 2011-12-22 | 신현희 | Method of electronic book distribution for children by sharing reading history information |
US20120324393A1 (en) * | 2011-06-20 | 2012-12-20 | Lightcode, Inc. | Network based electronic book usage tracking system and method |
EP2745214A2 (en) * | 2011-08-19 | 2014-06-25 | Apple Inc. | Authoring content for digital books |
US8504536B2 (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2013-08-06 | Sirsi Corporation | Normalizing metadata between library content providers |
CN102521280B (en) * | 2011-11-26 | 2014-07-09 | 华为技术有限公司 | Loading method and loading device of EPub electronic book |
US20130145028A1 (en) * | 2011-12-05 | 2013-06-06 | Google Inc. | Access Control List |
US9495476B2 (en) * | 2012-03-23 | 2016-11-15 | The Boeing Company | Panoptic visualization of an illustrated parts catalog |
US20140156554A1 (en) * | 2012-03-29 | 2014-06-05 | George Stewart Payne, IV | Apparatus and method for the categorization of scanned information, in particular the maturity level of literature distributed to consumers, to express the categorizations to consumers |
US9959016B2 (en) * | 2012-09-07 | 2018-05-01 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and digital device for access control with fingerprint authentication |
AU350316S (en) * | 2013-01-04 | 2013-08-23 | Samsung Electronics Co Ltd | Display Screen For An Electronic Device |
KR20150002358A (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2015-01-07 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and electronic device for displaying e-book |
US10109213B2 (en) * | 2013-08-13 | 2018-10-23 | LightSail Education | Educational E-reader platform |
US9961265B2 (en) * | 2014-10-06 | 2018-05-01 | Shafiq Ahmad Chaudhry | Method for capturing and storing historic audiovisual data via a digital mirror |
US20160234267A1 (en) * | 2015-02-06 | 2016-08-11 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Sharing digital content using an interactive send service system |
Citations (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5737619A (en) * | 1995-10-19 | 1998-04-07 | Judson; David Hugh | World wide web browsing with content delivery over an idle connection and interstitial content display |
US5761485A (en) * | 1995-12-01 | 1998-06-02 | Munyan; Daniel E. | Personal electronic book system |
US6182133B1 (en) * | 1998-02-06 | 2001-01-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for display of information prefetching and cache status having variable visual indication based on a period of time since prefetching |
US6315572B1 (en) * | 1995-03-22 | 2001-11-13 | William M. Bancroft | Method and system for computerized authoring, learning, and evaluation |
US6385614B1 (en) * | 1998-01-14 | 2002-05-07 | Netlibrary Inc. | Electronic bookshelf with multi-user features |
US6563514B1 (en) * | 2000-04-13 | 2003-05-13 | Extensio Software, Inc. | System and method for providing contextual and dynamic information retrieval |
US6584498B2 (en) * | 1996-09-13 | 2003-06-24 | Planet Web, Inc. | Dynamic preloading of web pages |
US6622168B1 (en) * | 2000-04-10 | 2003-09-16 | Chutney Technologies, Inc. | Dynamic page generation acceleration using component-level caching |
US20030177445A1 (en) * | 2002-03-13 | 2003-09-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | System for describing markup language for mobile use, and information processing apparatus and program for generating display content |
US20040095400A1 (en) * | 2002-11-19 | 2004-05-20 | Anderson Andrew T. | Reconfiguration of content for display on devices of different types |
US6789075B1 (en) * | 1996-06-10 | 2004-09-07 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Method and system for prioritized downloading of embedded web objects |
US20040205149A1 (en) * | 2002-09-11 | 2004-10-14 | Hughes Electronics | System and method for pre-fetching content in a proxy architecture |
US6859805B1 (en) * | 1999-11-29 | 2005-02-22 | Actuate Corporation | Method and apparatus for generating page-level security in a computer generated report |
US7194678B1 (en) * | 1999-03-02 | 2007-03-20 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Dynamic web page generation method and system |
US8175977B2 (en) * | 1998-12-28 | 2012-05-08 | Audible | License management for digital content |
US8639694B1 (en) * | 1994-09-02 | 2014-01-28 | Google Inc. | Client-side processing of preload operations |
Family Cites Families (671)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
GB1204190A (en) | 1966-12-26 | 1970-09-03 | Mainichi Broadcasting System | Multiplex communication system |
US3860873A (en) | 1971-10-01 | 1975-01-14 | Tape Athon Corp | Fm transmission system |
US3891792A (en) | 1974-06-25 | 1975-06-24 | Asahi Broadcasting | Television character crawl display method and apparatus |
US3978470A (en) | 1974-07-10 | 1976-08-31 | Midwest Analog And Digital, Inc. | Multi-channel data color display apparatus |
US4197590A (en) | 1976-01-19 | 1980-04-08 | Nugraphics, Inc. | Method for dynamically viewing image elements stored in a random access memory array |
FR2363949A1 (en) | 1976-09-06 | 1978-03-31 | Telediffusion Fse | DIGITAL TRANSMISSION AND TEXT DISPLAY SYSTEM ON A TELEVISION SCREEN |
US4071697A (en) | 1976-10-18 | 1978-01-31 | Atari, Inc. | Interactive video/telephone transmission system |
US4528589A (en) | 1977-02-14 | 1985-07-09 | Telease, Inc. | Method and system for subscription television billing and access |
US4160242A (en) | 1977-06-28 | 1979-07-03 | Fowler Gerald C | Reading machine |
US4179212A (en) | 1977-09-06 | 1979-12-18 | Xerox Corporation | Demand publishing royalty accounting system |
US4159417A (en) | 1977-10-28 | 1979-06-26 | Rubincam David P | Electronic book |
US4405829A (en) | 1977-12-14 | 1983-09-20 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Cryptographic communications system and method |
NL7802132A (en) | 1978-02-27 | 1979-08-29 | Philips Nv | PORTABLE ELEMENT FOR RECORDING, REMEMBERING, DISPLAYING AND DISPLAYING DIGITAL INFORMATION AND BOOKING DEVICE FOR USE IN A BOOKING SYSTEM. |
JPS54129942A (en) | 1978-03-31 | 1979-10-08 | Fujitsu Ltd | Direct transfer system between sub-systems |
US4860379A (en) | 1979-05-18 | 1989-08-22 | General Instrument Corporation | Data communications system |
US4513390A (en) | 1979-06-08 | 1985-04-23 | Planning Research Corporation | System for digital transmission and synthesis of integrated data |
US4406626A (en) | 1979-07-31 | 1983-09-27 | Anderson Weston A | Electronic teaching aid |
US4302193A (en) | 1980-01-17 | 1981-11-24 | Haynes Leonard S | Reading tutor timer |
US4398216A (en) | 1980-09-19 | 1983-08-09 | Telease, Inc. | Multiple signal transmission method and system, particularly for television |
DE3036552C2 (en) | 1980-09-27 | 1985-04-25 | Blaupunkt-Werke Gmbh, 3200 Hildesheim | Television reception system |
US4455570A (en) | 1980-10-13 | 1984-06-19 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | CATV System |
US4381522A (en) | 1980-12-01 | 1983-04-26 | Adams-Russell Co., Inc. | Selective viewing |
US4688218A (en) | 1981-07-15 | 1987-08-18 | Etablissement Public De Diffusion Dit "Telediffusion De France" | Multiplex channels for continuous flow for numerical signal |
US4604710A (en) | 1981-10-09 | 1986-08-05 | International Business Machines Corporation | System for converting data processing information to text processing format and vice versa |
US4965825A (en) | 1981-11-03 | 1990-10-23 | The Personalized Mass Media Corporation | Signal processing apparatus and methods |
US4694490A (en) | 1981-11-03 | 1987-09-15 | Harvey John C | Signal processing apparatus and methods |
EP0096705A1 (en) | 1981-12-19 | 1983-12-28 | CHARD, Frederick William | Method and apparatus for editing the output of a television set |
CA1200910A (en) | 1981-12-29 | 1986-02-18 | Toshiaki Yamada | Terminal device for editing document and communicating data |
US4429385A (en) | 1981-12-31 | 1984-01-31 | American Newspaper Publishers Association | Method and apparatus for digital serial scanning with hierarchical and relational access |
DE3272234D1 (en) | 1982-01-29 | 1986-09-04 | Ibm | Audio response terminal for use with data processing systems |
CA1177558A (en) | 1982-04-15 | 1984-11-06 | Groupe Videotron Ltee. (Le) | Cable network data transmission system |
US4579533A (en) | 1982-04-26 | 1986-04-01 | Anderson Weston A | Method of teaching a subject including use of a dictionary and translator |
US4533948A (en) | 1982-04-30 | 1985-08-06 | General Instrument Corporation | CATV Communication system |
US4484217A (en) | 1982-05-11 | 1984-11-20 | Telease, Inc. | Method and system for remote reporting, particularly for pay television billing |
US4578531A (en) | 1982-06-09 | 1986-03-25 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Encryption system key distribution method and apparatus |
JPS59188A (en) | 1982-06-24 | 1984-01-05 | シャープ株式会社 | Portable general-purpose electronic apparatus |
US4567512A (en) | 1982-08-19 | 1986-01-28 | World Video Library, Inc. | Recorded program communication system |
ATE20994T1 (en) | 1982-09-07 | 1986-08-15 | Emi Plc Thorn | TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION NETWORK. |
US4517598A (en) | 1982-10-22 | 1985-05-14 | George Van Valkenburg | Method and apparatus for electronic publishing |
US4528643A (en) | 1983-01-10 | 1985-07-09 | Fpdc, Inc. | System for reproducing information in material objects at a point of sale location |
US4532540A (en) | 1983-03-28 | 1985-07-30 | Rca Corporation | Teletext set-top converter with transparent mode |
US4587520A (en) | 1983-04-07 | 1986-05-06 | Rca Corporation | Cursor controlled page selection in a video display |
US4916539A (en) | 1983-04-21 | 1990-04-10 | The Weather Channel, Inc. | Communications system having receivers which can be addressed in selected classes |
US4625235A (en) | 1983-05-19 | 1986-11-25 | Westinghouse Electric Corp. | Remote control switching of television sources |
US4613901A (en) | 1983-05-27 | 1986-09-23 | M/A-Com Linkabit, Inc. | Signal encryption and distribution system for controlling scrambling and selective remote descrambling of television signals |
US4566030A (en) | 1983-06-09 | 1986-01-21 | Ctba Associates | Television viewer data collection system |
US4816904A (en) | 1983-06-09 | 1989-03-28 | Control Data Corporation | Television and market research data collection system and method |
US4633462A (en) | 1983-07-18 | 1986-12-30 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | Multiple access communication on a CATV reverse channel |
WO1985001854A1 (en) | 1983-10-07 | 1985-04-25 | National Information Utilities Corporation | Education utility |
US4776011A (en) | 1983-10-24 | 1988-10-04 | Sony Corporation | Recursive key schedule cryptographic system |
AU576787B2 (en) | 1983-11-07 | 1988-09-08 | Sony Corporation | Satellite to cable television interface |
GB2149544B (en) | 1983-11-08 | 1987-03-25 | Standard Telephones Cables Ltd | Electronic books for the partially sighted |
NL8303991A (en) | 1983-11-18 | 1985-06-17 | Nl Standard Electric Mij B V | CABLE TELEVISION NETWORK. |
US4742543A (en) | 1983-12-22 | 1988-05-03 | Frederiksen Jeffrey E | Video transmission system |
GB8401318D0 (en) | 1984-01-18 | 1984-02-22 | Communications Patents Ltd | Communications system |
NL8400860A (en) | 1984-03-16 | 1985-10-16 | Nl Standard Electric Mij B V | CABLE TELEVISION NETWORK. |
US4625076A (en) | 1984-03-19 | 1986-11-25 | Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation | Signed document transmission system |
US4602279A (en) | 1984-03-21 | 1986-07-22 | Actv, Inc. | Method for providing targeted profile interactive CATV displays |
AU3542284A (en) | 1984-03-30 | 1985-10-03 | Wang Laboratories, Inc. | Enhanced videotex decoder |
GB8410671D0 (en) | 1984-04-26 | 1984-05-31 | British Telecomm | Transmitting stereo audio programmes |
US4697209A (en) | 1984-04-26 | 1987-09-29 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Methods and apparatus for automatically identifying programs viewed or recorded |
EP0167237A3 (en) | 1984-05-31 | 1988-08-03 | AMERICAN TELEVISION & COMMUNICATIONS CORPORATION | Cable television system |
US4673976A (en) | 1984-05-31 | 1987-06-16 | American Television & Communications Corporation | Cable television system data verification apparatus |
DE3423846A1 (en) | 1984-06-28 | 1986-01-09 | Telefunken Fernseh Und Rundfunk Gmbh, 3000 Hannover | Television receiver with a teletext decoder |
US4644470A (en) | 1984-07-20 | 1987-02-17 | International Business Machines Corp. | Non-unique names for broadcast messages |
US4941125A (en) | 1984-08-01 | 1990-07-10 | Smithsonian Institution | Information storage and retrieval system |
US4724491A (en) | 1984-08-28 | 1988-02-09 | Adams-Russell Co., Inc. | Inserting television advertising spots automatically |
US4829569A (en) | 1984-09-21 | 1989-05-09 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Communication of individual messages to subscribers in a subscription television system |
US4890319A (en) | 1984-09-21 | 1989-12-26 | Scientific-Atlantic, Inc. | Method for controlling copying of protected information transmitted over a communications link |
US4774655A (en) | 1984-10-24 | 1988-09-27 | Telebase Systems, Inc. | System for retrieving information from a plurality of remote databases having at least two different languages |
US5036537A (en) | 1984-11-19 | 1991-07-30 | General Instrument Corp. | Geographic black-out method for direct broadcast satellite system |
GB8429488D0 (en) | 1984-11-22 | 1985-01-03 | Communications Patents Ltd | Interactive television distribution system |
US4868866A (en) | 1984-12-28 | 1989-09-19 | Mcgraw-Hill Inc. | Broadcast data distribution system |
US4709266A (en) | 1985-01-14 | 1987-11-24 | Oak Industries Inc. | Satellite scrambling communication network using geographically separated uplinks |
US4616263A (en) | 1985-02-11 | 1986-10-07 | Gte Corporation | Video subsystem for a hybrid videotex facility |
NL8500690A (en) | 1985-03-12 | 1986-10-01 | Philips Nv | REMOTE CONTROL UNIT FOR OPERATING VARIOUS MODULES. |
SE448277B (en) | 1985-04-12 | 1987-02-09 | Draco Ab | INDICATOR DEVICE WITH A DOSAGE DEVICE FOR MEDICINAL PRODUCTS |
EP0200310B1 (en) | 1985-05-01 | 1993-08-11 | General Instrument Corporation | Direct broadcast satellite signal transmission system |
US4731840A (en) | 1985-05-06 | 1988-03-15 | The United States Of America As Represented By The United States Department Of Energy | Method for encryption and transmission of digital keying data |
US4751578A (en) | 1985-05-28 | 1988-06-14 | David P. Gordon | System for electronically controllably viewing on a television updateable television programming information |
US4706121B1 (en) | 1985-07-12 | 1993-12-14 | Insight Telecast, Inc. | Tv schedule system and process |
GB2177873B (en) | 1985-07-19 | 1989-11-22 | Marconi Electronic Devices | Communications system |
US4891838A (en) | 1985-11-04 | 1990-01-02 | Dental Data Service, Inc. | Computer accessing system |
US4854878A (en) | 1985-11-29 | 1989-08-08 | Malvino, Inc. | Textbook with animated illustrations |
US4688246A (en) | 1985-12-20 | 1987-08-18 | Zenith Electronics Corporation | CATV scrambling system with compressed digital audio in synchronizing signal intervals |
JPS62185485A (en) | 1986-02-10 | 1987-08-13 | Pioneer Electronic Corp | Setting system for limit capable of viewing/listing charged program in bidirectional catv system |
EP0243312B1 (en) | 1986-04-18 | 1995-07-19 | Nagra Plus S.A. | Decoder for a pay television system |
USD301037S (en) | 1986-04-28 | 1989-05-09 | Multivision Products, Inc. | Hand-held remote control |
US4694483A (en) | 1986-06-02 | 1987-09-15 | Innings Telecom Inc. | Computerized system for routing incoming telephone calls to a plurality of agent positions |
EP0252646B1 (en) | 1986-07-07 | 1993-09-29 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Paperless portable book |
US4890321A (en) | 1986-07-08 | 1989-12-26 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | Communications format for a subscription television system permitting transmission of individual text messages to subscribers |
US4866770A (en) | 1986-07-08 | 1989-09-12 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for communication of video, audio, teletext, and data to groups of decoders in a communication system |
US5202817A (en) | 1989-06-07 | 1993-04-13 | Norand Corporation | Hand-held data capture system with interchangeable modules |
US4792972A (en) | 1986-08-19 | 1988-12-20 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Remote programming of CATV channel authorization unit |
US4712130A (en) | 1986-08-29 | 1987-12-08 | Rca Corporation | Chrominance signal frequency converter as for a pix-in-pix television receiver |
USD314384S (en) | 1986-09-23 | 1991-02-05 | RUF GmbH & Co. KG Elektrotechnische Spezialfabrik | Remote control transmitter |
US4796220A (en) | 1986-12-15 | 1989-01-03 | Pride Software Development Corp. | Method of controlling the copying of software |
US4820167A (en) * | 1987-01-14 | 1989-04-11 | Nobles Anthony A | Electronic school teaching system |
JP2658030B2 (en) | 1987-01-30 | 1997-09-30 | ソニー株式会社 | Information transmission equipment |
JP2722450B2 (en) | 1987-02-25 | 1998-03-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Central control device |
EP0347419B1 (en) | 1987-02-27 | 1994-11-09 | Logicblend Limited | Improvements in interactive video systems |
US4885803A (en) | 1987-03-17 | 1989-12-05 | Lawrence W. Hermann | System and method for controlling a plurality of electronic entertainment devices |
US4985697A (en) | 1987-07-06 | 1991-01-15 | Learning Insights, Ltd. | Electronic book educational publishing method using buried reference materials and alternate learning levels |
US4847700A (en) | 1987-07-16 | 1989-07-11 | Actv, Inc. | Interactive television system for providing full motion synched compatible audio/visual displays from transmitted television signals |
US5152011A (en) | 1987-07-27 | 1992-09-29 | Schwob Pierre R | Broadcast receiver capable of automatic station identification and format-scanning based on an internal database updatable via data reception over the airwaves |
CA1288516C (en) | 1987-07-31 | 1991-09-03 | Leendert M. Bijnagte | Apparatus and method for communicating textual and image information between a host computer and a remote display terminal |
US4829372A (en) | 1987-08-20 | 1989-05-09 | Telaction Corporation | Presentation player |
US5208665A (en) | 1987-08-20 | 1993-05-04 | Telaction Corporation | Presentation player for an interactive digital communication system |
JPS6450688A (en) | 1987-08-21 | 1989-02-27 | Hashimoto Corp | Method and device for generating individual television program |
US4930160A (en) | 1987-09-02 | 1990-05-29 | Vogel Peter S | Automatic censorship of video programs |
US5099331A (en) | 1987-09-04 | 1992-03-24 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Apparatus for overlaying a displayed image with a second image |
US4876736A (en) | 1987-09-23 | 1989-10-24 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Method and apparatus for determining channel reception of a receiver |
US4924513A (en) | 1987-09-25 | 1990-05-08 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Apparatus and method for secure transmission of data over an unsecure transmission channel |
US5414426A (en) | 1987-10-14 | 1995-05-09 | Universal Electronics Inc. | Favorite key macro command and chained macro command in a remote control |
US4959810A (en) | 1987-10-14 | 1990-09-25 | Universal Electronics, Inc. | Universal remote control device |
US4918516A (en) | 1987-10-26 | 1990-04-17 | 501 Actv, Inc. | Closed circuit television system having seamless interactive television programming and expandable user participation |
US4835607A (en) | 1987-11-16 | 1989-05-30 | Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for expanding compressed video data |
US4855725A (en) | 1987-11-24 | 1989-08-08 | Fernandez Emilio A | Microprocessor based simulated book |
US4947429A (en) | 1987-11-30 | 1990-08-07 | Zenith Electronics Corporation | Pay per view television signaling method |
US4920432A (en) | 1988-01-12 | 1990-04-24 | Eggers Derek C | System for random access to an audio video data library with independent selection and display at each of a plurality of remote locations |
US5132789A (en) | 1988-01-15 | 1992-07-21 | Tiltrac Corporation | Tilt rack video tape library and VCP to multiple subscriber system |
US4829558A (en) | 1988-01-19 | 1989-05-09 | Peac Media Research, Inc. | System and device for data transmission, and related method |
FR2627045B1 (en) | 1988-02-05 | 1994-07-01 | Sgs Thomson Microelectronics | SELECTION SYSTEM FOR RECEIVING BROADCASTED OR BROADCASTED BROADCASTS |
US5010499A (en) | 1988-02-22 | 1991-04-23 | Yee Keen Y | Digital data capture for use with TV set or monitor |
US5121476A (en) | 1988-02-22 | 1992-06-09 | Yee Keen Y | TV data capture device |
US5157783A (en) | 1988-02-26 | 1992-10-20 | Wang Laboratories, Inc. | Data base system which maintains project query list, desktop list and status of multiple ongoing research projects |
US4899292A (en) | 1988-03-02 | 1990-02-06 | Image Storage/Retrieval Systems, Inc. | System for storing and retrieving text and associated graphics |
US5319454A (en) | 1990-11-13 | 1994-06-07 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | CATV system enabling access to premium (pay per view) program events by bar code data entry |
US5155590A (en) | 1990-03-20 | 1992-10-13 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | System for data channel level control |
US5235619A (en) | 1990-03-20 | 1993-08-10 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Cable television radio frequency subscriber data transmission apparatus and rf return method |
US5003384A (en) | 1988-04-01 | 1991-03-26 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | Set-top interface transactions in an impulse pay per view television system |
US4928177A (en) | 1988-04-11 | 1990-05-22 | Cooper Industries, Inc. | Two-way data broadcast networks |
US4816901A (en) | 1988-04-27 | 1989-03-28 | Universal Video Communications Corp. | Method and system for compressing color video data |
US4907082A (en) | 1988-05-03 | 1990-03-06 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Dynamic control menu for a television system or the like |
US4982344A (en) | 1988-05-18 | 1991-01-01 | Xerox Corporation | Accelerating link creation |
WO1989011693A1 (en) | 1988-05-27 | 1989-11-30 | Wang Laboratories, Inc. | Document annotation and manipulation in a data processing system |
US4995078A (en) | 1988-06-09 | 1991-02-19 | Monslow H Vincent | Television broadcast system for selective transmission of viewer-chosen programs at viewer-requested times |
US5130924A (en) | 1988-06-30 | 1992-07-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | System for defining relationships among document elements including logical relationships of elements in a multi-dimensional tabular specification |
US4977455B1 (en) | 1988-07-15 | 1993-04-13 | System and process for vcr scheduling | |
US5208745A (en) | 1988-07-25 | 1993-05-04 | Electric Power Research Institute | Multimedia interface and method for computer system |
JPH0695759B2 (en) | 1988-08-08 | 1994-11-24 | パイオニア株式会社 | Billing display system for CCTV device |
US5247575A (en) | 1988-08-16 | 1993-09-21 | Sprague Peter J | Information distribution system |
JP3002471B2 (en) | 1988-08-19 | 2000-01-24 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Program distribution device |
US4965819A (en) | 1988-09-22 | 1990-10-23 | Docu-Vision, Inc. | Video conferencing system for courtroom and other applications |
US5446488A (en) | 1988-09-30 | 1995-08-29 | Vogel; Peter S. | Television programme distribution signal having the capability to selectively block non-programme material |
US5221962A (en) | 1988-10-03 | 1993-06-22 | Popeil Industries, Inc. | Subliminal device having manual adjustment of perception level of subliminal messages |
US4975951A (en) | 1988-10-07 | 1990-12-04 | General Instrument Corporation | IPPV programming distribution control system |
USD325581S (en) | 1988-10-07 | 1992-04-21 | Cable Electric Products, Inc. | Remote control |
US5105268A (en) | 1988-11-08 | 1992-04-14 | Fujitsu Limited | Community antenna broadcast system having an improved channel selecting system permitting purchase of a selected channel from a plurality of non-purchased channels |
CA2002912A1 (en) | 1988-11-14 | 1990-05-14 | William A. Clough | Portable computer with touch screen and computer system employing same |
US5089956A (en) | 1988-11-29 | 1992-02-18 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method of distributing related documents to identified end users in an information processing system |
JPH02152382A (en) | 1988-12-02 | 1990-06-12 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Teletext receiver |
US5038402A (en) | 1988-12-06 | 1991-08-06 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus and method for providing digital audio in the FM broadcast band |
US5199104A (en) | 1988-12-15 | 1993-03-30 | Sony Corporation | Electronic organizer with electronic book marker |
US5159669A (en) * | 1988-12-15 | 1992-10-27 | Xerox Corporation | Automatically creating a second workspace operation record including history data and a unit ID based on a first workspace operation |
US4949187A (en) | 1988-12-16 | 1990-08-14 | Cohen Jason M | Video communications system having a remotely controlled central source of video and audio data |
US5001554A (en) | 1988-12-23 | 1991-03-19 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Terminal authorization method |
US5077607A (en) | 1988-12-23 | 1991-12-31 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Cable television transaction terminal |
KR920002049B1 (en) | 1988-12-31 | 1992-03-10 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Multi-screen execution method |
CA1319762C (en) | 1989-02-28 | 1993-06-29 | Elie Cassorla | Method for displaying online information |
US5124980A (en) | 1989-03-20 | 1992-06-23 | Maki Gerald G | Synchronous multiport digital 2-way communications network using T1 PCM on a CATV cable |
JPH0322259A (en) | 1989-03-22 | 1991-01-30 | Seiko Epson Corp | Small-sized data display and reproducing device |
US5239665A (en) | 1989-03-30 | 1993-08-24 | Hiuka Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Electronic book having several keys for changing pages and underlining certain portions of text |
US4996597A (en) | 1989-04-20 | 1991-02-26 | Rca Licensing Corporation | User programmable switching arrangement |
US5015829A (en) | 1989-04-28 | 1991-05-14 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Key pad and front panel assembly for an electronic instrument |
US4947244A (en) | 1989-05-03 | 1990-08-07 | On Command Video Corporation | Video selection and distribution system |
NL8901133A (en) | 1989-05-03 | 1990-12-03 | Nederland Ptt | DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA VIA INFORMATION FREE ZONES IN A TELEVISION SIGNAL TO BE TRANSMITTED BY A TRANSMITTER. |
US5014125A (en) | 1989-05-05 | 1991-05-07 | Cableshare, Inc. | Television system for the interactive distribution of selectable video presentations |
US5150118A (en) | 1989-05-08 | 1992-09-22 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Interchangeable coded key pad assemblies alternately attachable to a user definable keyboard to enable programmable keyboard functions |
US5151782A (en) | 1989-05-17 | 1992-09-29 | Reiss Media Enterprises | Control system for satellite delivered pay-per-view television system |
US5003591A (en) | 1989-05-25 | 1991-03-26 | General Instrument Corporation | Functionally modifiable cable television converter system |
JPH0620187Y2 (en) | 1989-05-26 | 1994-05-25 | アルプス電気株式会社 | Trackball |
US5253066C1 (en) | 1989-06-01 | 2001-05-22 | United Video Properties Inc | Tv recording and viewing control system |
US5047867A (en) | 1989-06-08 | 1991-09-10 | North American Philips Corporation | Interface for a TV-VCR system |
IL94519A (en) | 1989-06-13 | 1993-07-08 | Tv Answer Int Inc | Satellite television communication system for audience polling and processing answers |
US5319453A (en) | 1989-06-22 | 1994-06-07 | Airtrax | Method and apparatus for video signal encoding, decoding and monitoring |
US5663757A (en) | 1989-07-14 | 1997-09-02 | Morales; Fernando | Software controlled multi-mode interactive TV systems |
JP2830111B2 (en) | 1989-07-21 | 1998-12-02 | ソニー株式会社 | High efficiency coding device |
USD326446S (en) | 1989-07-26 | 1992-05-26 | Wong Curtis G | Combined electronic book and CD ROM reader |
US5166886A (en) | 1989-07-31 | 1992-11-24 | Molnar Charles E | System to demonstrate and sell computer programs |
US5231631A (en) | 1989-08-15 | 1993-07-27 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Arrangement for regulating traffic in a high speed data network |
US5167508A (en) | 1989-08-21 | 1992-12-01 | Mc Taggart Stephen I | Electronic book |
US5484292A (en) | 1989-08-21 | 1996-01-16 | Mctaggart; Stephen I. | Apparatus for combining audio and visual indicia |
US5046093A (en) | 1989-09-05 | 1991-09-03 | General Instrument Corporation | CATV subscriber apparatus with intelligent remote control |
US5056138A (en) | 1989-09-11 | 1991-10-08 | Nuphase Electronics, Inc. | Television selection system |
JP2547641B2 (en) | 1989-09-27 | 1996-10-23 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Program reservation device |
US5343516A (en) | 1989-09-29 | 1994-08-30 | Digital Systems Group, Inc. | Computer telecommunications signalling interface |
US5049862A (en) | 1989-10-06 | 1991-09-17 | Communication Intelligence Corporation ("Cic") | Keyless flat panel portable computer--computer aided notebook |
US5339239A (en) | 1989-10-13 | 1994-08-16 | Mitsubishi Plastics Industries Limited | Information collecting and/or service furnishing systems by which a user can request information from a central data base using a portable personal terminal and an access terminal |
US5073930A (en) | 1989-10-19 | 1991-12-17 | Green James A | Method and system for receiving and distributing satellite transmitted television signals |
US5128662A (en) | 1989-10-20 | 1992-07-07 | Failla Stephen J | Collapsibly segmented display screens for computers or the like |
US5155591A (en) | 1989-10-23 | 1992-10-13 | General Instrument Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing demographically targeted television commercials |
US5099319A (en) | 1989-10-23 | 1992-03-24 | Esch Arthur G | Video information delivery method and apparatus |
DE3935294A1 (en) | 1989-10-24 | 1991-04-25 | Grundig Emv | VIDEORECORDER WITH A DEVICE FOR STORING THE CONTENTS OF A TAPE MAGAZINE CONTAINING A VARIETY OF MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTES |
US5241671C1 (en) | 1989-10-26 | 2002-07-02 | Encyclopaedia Britannica Educa | Multimedia search system using a plurality of entry path means which indicate interrelatedness of information |
JPH03141752A (en) | 1989-10-27 | 1991-06-17 | Hitachi Ltd | Picture signal transmitting method |
DE69033905T2 (en) | 1989-10-30 | 2003-02-06 | Starsight Telecast Inc | INTERFACE BETWEEN CABLE TELEVISION CODES AND TV ACCESSORIES |
US5353121A (en) | 1989-10-30 | 1994-10-04 | Starsight Telecast, Inc. | Television schedule system |
IT1237668B (en) | 1989-10-31 | 1993-06-15 | Telettra Lab Telefon | SYSTEM AND MULTIPLATOR / DEMULTIPLATOR FOR THE TRANSMISSION / RECEPTION OF DIGITAL TELEVISION INFORMATION. |
US5318450A (en) | 1989-11-22 | 1994-06-07 | Gte California Incorporated | Multimedia distribution system for instructional materials |
US5218672A (en) | 1990-01-19 | 1993-06-08 | Sony Corporation Of America | Offline editing system with user interface for controlling edit list generation |
JP2822526B2 (en) | 1990-01-19 | 1998-11-11 | ソニー株式会社 | Personal information processing apparatus and personal information processing method |
US5237610A (en) | 1990-02-01 | 1993-08-17 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Independent external security module for a digitally upgradeable television signal decoder |
US5130792A (en) | 1990-02-01 | 1992-07-14 | Usa Video Inc. | Store and forward video system |
US5446919A (en) | 1990-02-20 | 1995-08-29 | Wilkins; Jeff K. | Communication system and method with demographically or psychographically defined audiences |
JP3080382B2 (en) | 1990-02-21 | 2000-08-28 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Cryptographic communication system |
US5146552A (en) | 1990-02-28 | 1992-09-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method for associating annotation with electronically published material |
US5351075A (en) | 1990-03-20 | 1994-09-27 | Frederick Herz | Home video club television broadcasting system |
US5251324A (en) | 1990-03-20 | 1993-10-05 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for generating and collecting viewing statistics for remote terminals in a cable television system |
DE69121444T2 (en) | 1990-03-29 | 1997-03-13 | Gte Laboratories Inc | Monitoring system for the transmission of video signals |
US5115426A (en) | 1990-03-30 | 1992-05-19 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Broadband isdn packet switching arrangements |
US5091782A (en) | 1990-04-09 | 1992-02-25 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus and method for adaptively compressing successive blocks of digital video |
US5020129A (en) | 1990-04-16 | 1991-05-28 | General Instrument Corporation | Addressable control system for CATV program distribution |
US5256067A (en) | 1990-04-25 | 1993-10-26 | Gildea Patricia M | Device and method for optimal reading vocabulary development |
US5321846A (en) | 1990-04-28 | 1994-06-14 | Sony Corporation | Signal transmission system with quicker response and with parallel and serial outputs |
US5233333A (en) | 1990-05-21 | 1993-08-03 | Borsuk Sherwin M | Portable hand held reading unit with reading aid feature |
US5257185A (en) * | 1990-05-21 | 1993-10-26 | Ann W. Farley | Interactive, cross-referenced knowledge system |
USD331760S (en) | 1990-05-29 | 1992-12-15 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Remote control |
US5640552A (en) | 1990-05-29 | 1997-06-17 | Franklin Electronic Publishers, Incorporated | Method and apparatus for providing multi-level searching in an electronic book |
CA2039652C (en) | 1990-05-30 | 1996-12-24 | Frank Zdybel, Jr. | Hardcopy lossless data storage and communications for electronic document processing systems |
IL94729A0 (en) | 1990-06-13 | 1991-04-15 | Yossef Yomdin | Compressed image production,storage transmission and processing |
US5057917A (en) | 1990-06-20 | 1991-10-15 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | Real-time data compression of broadcast video signals |
US5260778A (en) | 1990-06-26 | 1993-11-09 | General Instrument Corporation | Apparatus for selective distribution of messages over a communications network |
US5859594A (en) | 1990-06-28 | 1999-01-12 | Motorola, Inc. | Selective call receiver having selectable displays |
US5428529A (en) | 1990-06-29 | 1995-06-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Structured document tags invoking specialized functions |
US5130815A (en) | 1990-07-20 | 1992-07-14 | Mti Associates | Method and apparatus for encoding a video signal having multi-language capabilities |
AU8415891A (en) | 1990-07-27 | 1992-03-02 | Harvey M. Ross | System and method of manufacturing a single book copy |
CA2022302C (en) | 1990-07-30 | 1995-02-28 | Douglas J. Ballantyne | Method and apparatus for distribution of movies |
EP0472070A3 (en) | 1990-08-22 | 1993-06-23 | Xerox Corporation | Electronic library |
JPH04200082A (en) | 1990-11-29 | 1992-07-21 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Teletext broadcast receiver |
JP3089479B2 (en) | 1990-09-04 | 2000-09-18 | ソニー株式会社 | Television image display |
US5388196A (en) * | 1990-09-07 | 1995-02-07 | Xerox Corporation | Hierarchical shared books with database |
ATE220273T1 (en) | 1990-09-10 | 2002-07-15 | Starsight Telecast Inc | TELEVISION PROGRAM SYSTEM |
US5103314A (en) | 1990-09-24 | 1992-04-07 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Color-coded system for selection of rf input terminals and associated scan lists |
JP2552030B2 (en) | 1990-09-27 | 1996-11-06 | マスプロ電工株式会社 | Satellite signal receiver |
US5319542A (en) | 1990-09-27 | 1994-06-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | System for ordering items using an electronic catalogue |
US5319455A (en) | 1990-09-28 | 1994-06-07 | Ictv Inc. | System for distributing customized commercials to television viewers |
US5093718A (en) | 1990-09-28 | 1992-03-03 | Inteletext Systems, Inc. | Interactive home information system |
DE69132600T2 (en) | 1990-10-01 | 2002-02-07 | Thomas A Bush | TRANSACTION PROCESSING SYSTEM |
US5204947A (en) | 1990-10-31 | 1993-04-20 | International Business Machines Corporation | Application independent (open) hypermedia enablement services |
US5282028A (en) | 1990-11-27 | 1994-01-25 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Remote control for digital music terminal with synchronized communications |
US5345580A (en) | 1990-11-29 | 1994-09-06 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Microprocessor device and emulator device thereof |
US5327554A (en) | 1990-11-29 | 1994-07-05 | Palazzi Iii Michael A | Interactive terminal for the access of remote database information |
US5172413A (en) | 1990-12-20 | 1992-12-15 | Sasktel | Secure hierarchial video delivery system and method |
USD329238S (en) | 1990-12-21 | 1992-09-08 | Tandy Corporation | Universal remote controller |
US5206722A (en) | 1990-12-28 | 1993-04-27 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Remote channel switching for video on demand service |
US5132992A (en) | 1991-01-07 | 1992-07-21 | Paul Yurt | Audio and video transmission and receiving system |
US5253275A (en) | 1991-01-07 | 1993-10-12 | H. Lee Browne | Audio and video transmission and receiving system |
US5383112A (en) | 1991-01-07 | 1995-01-17 | Gte Service Corporation | Inventory management method |
JPH04245818A (en) | 1991-01-31 | 1992-09-02 | Pioneer Electron Corp | Information transmission system |
US5367643A (en) | 1991-02-06 | 1994-11-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Generic high bandwidth adapter having data packet memory configured in three level hierarchy for temporary storage of variable length data packets |
US5285272A (en) | 1991-02-26 | 1994-02-08 | Sasktel | Video store and forward on demand apparatus and method |
US5253341A (en) | 1991-03-04 | 1993-10-12 | Rozmanith Anthony I | Remote query communication system |
BR9205792A (en) | 1991-03-19 | 1994-06-28 | Scientific Atlanta | Process for generating and collecting statistics on screen, device for channel monitoring, device for recording and transmitting channel from remote terminal |
US5220649A (en) | 1991-03-20 | 1993-06-15 | Forcier Mitchell D | Script/binary-encoded-character processing method and system with moving space insertion mode |
JP3105015B2 (en) | 1991-03-25 | 2000-10-30 | パイオニア株式会社 | Terminal device in CATV system |
US5764276A (en) | 1991-05-13 | 1998-06-09 | Interactive Pictures Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing perceived video viewing experiences using still images |
US5384588A (en) | 1991-05-13 | 1995-01-24 | Telerobotics International, Inc. | System for omindirectional image viewing at a remote location without the transmission of control signals to select viewing parameters |
US5185667A (en) | 1991-05-13 | 1993-02-09 | Telerobotics International, Inc. | Omniview motionless camera orientation system |
US5903319A (en) | 1991-05-13 | 1999-05-11 | Interactive Pictures Corporation | Method for eliminating temporal and spacial distortion from interlaced video signals |
JP2938611B2 (en) | 1991-05-14 | 1999-08-23 | 富士通株式会社 | TV signal exchange system |
US5479508A (en) | 1991-05-22 | 1995-12-26 | Zenith Electronics Corp. | Method of operating a pay per view television system |
US5216515A (en) | 1991-05-23 | 1993-06-01 | Adexpress Company | Addressable video feed system |
JP2622049B2 (en) | 1991-05-24 | 1997-06-18 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Cable broadcasting system |
FR2677166B1 (en) | 1991-05-30 | 1993-08-06 | Alsthom Gec | METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A CONTACT TULIP AND CONTACT TULIP CARRIED OUT ACCORDING TO THE METHOD. |
JP3129762B2 (en) | 1991-06-06 | 2001-01-31 | シャープ株式会社 | Small information terminal |
CA2044574A1 (en) | 1991-06-13 | 1992-12-14 | Frederick James Anderson | Information distribution through a communication subscription system utilizing an interactive storage and retrieval device |
US5537473A (en) | 1991-07-08 | 1996-07-16 | Amstrad Public Limited Company | Video recorder system |
JP3308562B2 (en) | 1991-07-15 | 2002-07-29 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Video conference terminal |
CA2048039A1 (en) | 1991-07-19 | 1993-01-20 | Steven Derose | Data processing system and method for generating a representation for and random access rendering of electronic documents |
US5293540A (en) | 1991-07-29 | 1994-03-08 | Nview Corporation | Method and apparatus for merging independently generated internal video with external video |
US5237311A (en) | 1991-08-01 | 1993-08-17 | Picker International, Inc. | Hingedly supported integrated trackball and selection device |
US5367330A (en) | 1991-08-01 | 1994-11-22 | Luther Haave | Pay-per-view television delivery system |
US5210611A (en) | 1991-08-12 | 1993-05-11 | Keen Y. Yee | Automatic tuning radio/TV using filtered seek |
US5367621A (en) | 1991-09-06 | 1994-11-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Data processing method to provide a generalized link from a reference point in an on-line book to an arbitrary multimedia object which can be dynamically updated |
US5289271A (en) | 1991-09-09 | 1994-02-22 | Watson John C | Cable television-usage system |
JPH0575944A (en) | 1991-09-10 | 1993-03-26 | Sony Corp | Television receiver |
US5528281A (en) | 1991-09-27 | 1996-06-18 | Bell Atlantic Network Services | Method and system for accessing multimedia data over public switched telephone network |
US5247347A (en) | 1991-09-27 | 1993-09-21 | Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. | Pstn architecture for video-on-demand services |
US5396546A (en) | 1991-10-03 | 1995-03-07 | Viscorp | Apparatus and method for automatic and user configurable information appliance |
US5404393A (en) | 1991-10-03 | 1995-04-04 | Viscorp | Method and apparatus for interactive television through use of menu windows |
JP2710188B2 (en) | 1991-10-03 | 1998-02-10 | インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレイション | Method and data processing apparatus for generating interaction between data processing system and user |
US5524193A (en) | 1991-10-15 | 1996-06-04 | And Communications | Interactive multimedia annotation method and apparatus |
US5173051B1 (en) | 1991-10-15 | 1997-06-10 | Optical Data Corp | Curriculum planning and publishing method |
US5416508A (en) | 1991-10-22 | 1995-05-16 | Pioneer Electronic Corporation | CATV system with transmission of program schedules, linked program broadcasts, and permissive ordering periods |
US5745711A (en) | 1991-10-23 | 1998-04-28 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Display control method and apparatus for an electronic conference |
US5350303A (en) | 1991-10-24 | 1994-09-27 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Method for accessing information in a computer |
US5235419A (en) | 1991-10-24 | 1993-08-10 | General Instrument Corporation | Adaptive motion compensation using a plurality of motion compensators |
US5182639A (en) | 1991-10-30 | 1993-01-26 | Suganda Jutamulia | Real-time analytic pseudocolor encoder system |
US5404505A (en) | 1991-11-01 | 1995-04-04 | Finisar Corporation | System for scheduling transmission of indexed and requested database tiers on demand at varying repetition rates |
US5315711A (en) | 1991-11-01 | 1994-05-24 | Unisys Corporation | Method and apparatus for remotely and centrally controlling a plurality of host processors |
WO1993009490A1 (en) | 1991-11-04 | 1993-05-13 | Vpr Systems Ltd. | Lap-top computer for retrieving and displaying text and graphic information encoded on personal library cd-rom |
US5734823A (en) | 1991-11-04 | 1998-03-31 | Microtome, Inc. | Systems and apparatus for electronic communication and storage of information |
US5632022A (en) | 1991-11-13 | 1997-05-20 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | Encyclopedia of software components |
GB9124337D0 (en) | 1991-11-15 | 1992-01-08 | Philips Electronic Associated | Method of storing user information items and apparatus for reproducing stored items |
JPH05143476A (en) | 1991-11-20 | 1993-06-11 | Fujitsu Ltd | Diagnostic system for instruction queue |
US5343239A (en) | 1991-11-20 | 1994-08-30 | Zing Systems, L.P. | Transaction based interactive television system |
JP3120085B2 (en) | 1991-11-21 | 2000-12-25 | 株式会社セガ | Electronic devices and information carriers |
US5724091A (en) | 1991-11-25 | 1998-03-03 | Actv, Inc. | Compressed digital data interactive program system |
US5497187A (en) | 1991-11-29 | 1996-03-05 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | In-band/out-of-band data transmission method and apparatus for a television system |
US5477262A (en) | 1991-11-29 | 1995-12-19 | Scientific-Altanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing an on-screen user interface for a subscription television terminal |
JP2793399B2 (en) | 1991-12-09 | 1998-09-03 | 日本電気株式会社 | Buffer device |
US5319649A (en) | 1991-12-27 | 1994-06-07 | Comstream Corporation | Transmission systems and decoders therefor |
US5195181A (en) | 1992-01-10 | 1993-03-16 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Message processing system having separate message receiving and transmitting processors with message processing being distributed between the separate processors |
US5689648A (en) | 1992-01-31 | 1997-11-18 | Raychem Corporation | Method and apparatus for publication of information |
JP3328951B2 (en) | 1992-02-07 | 2002-09-30 | ソニー株式会社 | TV receiver and tuning method |
US5390348A (en) | 1992-02-12 | 1995-02-14 | Creative Digital Inc. | System for tracking and correcting drift and dispersion in satellite transmission signals |
JP3299771B2 (en) | 1992-02-18 | 2002-07-08 | パイオニア株式会社 | Teletext receiver |
US5495581A (en) | 1992-02-25 | 1996-02-27 | Tsai; Irving | Method and apparatus for linking a document with associated reference information using pattern matching |
US5341166A (en) | 1992-02-27 | 1994-08-23 | Video Control Technology, Inc. | System for controlling selected devices having unique sets of control codes |
US5418957A (en) * | 1992-03-09 | 1995-05-23 | Narayan; Rom | Network data dictionary |
US5432561A (en) | 1992-03-27 | 1995-07-11 | North American Philips Corporation | System for automatically activating picture-in-picture when an auxiliary signal is detected |
US5444853A (en) | 1992-03-31 | 1995-08-22 | Seiko Epson Corporation | System and method for transferring data between a plurality of virtual FIFO's and a peripheral via a hardware FIFO and selectively updating control information associated with the virtual FIFO's |
DE4212184A1 (en) | 1992-04-10 | 1993-10-14 | Bosch Gmbh Robert | Hydraulic control unit for double acting working cylinder esp. in vehicle steering unit - controls both working volumes by one 4/3-way valve with hydraulic shut off valve connected between each working vol. and 4/3-way valve |
US5528490A (en) | 1992-04-10 | 1996-06-18 | Charles E. Hill & Associates, Inc. | Electronic catalog system and method |
JP2659896B2 (en) | 1992-04-29 | 1997-09-30 | インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレイション | Structured document copy management method and structured document copy management device |
US5262875A (en) | 1992-04-30 | 1993-11-16 | Instant Video Technologies, Inc. | Audio/video file server including decompression/playback means |
CA2257657A1 (en) | 1992-05-08 | 1993-11-25 | Market Data Corporation | Restricted information distribution system apparatus and methods |
US5371532A (en) | 1992-05-15 | 1994-12-06 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Communications architecture and method for distributing information services |
US5341474A (en) | 1992-05-15 | 1994-08-23 | Bell Communications Research, Inc. | Communications architecture and buffer for distributing information services |
EP0570785B1 (en) | 1992-05-19 | 1997-10-01 | THOMSON multimedia | Method and apparatus for device control by data transmission in TV lines |
US5469206A (en) | 1992-05-27 | 1995-11-21 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with electronic shopping information |
US5223924A (en) | 1992-05-27 | 1993-06-29 | North American Philips Corporation | System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with a T.V. program information database |
US5291554A (en) | 1992-05-28 | 1994-03-01 | Tv Answer, Inc. | Shared-price custom video rentals via interactive TV |
US5375068A (en) | 1992-06-03 | 1994-12-20 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Video teleconferencing for networked workstations |
US5689663A (en) | 1992-06-19 | 1997-11-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Remote controller user interface and methods relating thereto |
US5835732A (en) | 1993-10-28 | 1998-11-10 | Elonex Ip Holdings, Ltd. | Miniature digital assistant having enhanced host communication |
JPH0619978A (en) | 1992-06-30 | 1994-01-28 | Sony Corp | Reproducing and display device |
CA2139861A1 (en) | 1992-07-08 | 1994-01-20 | Bernard J. Craig | Media server for supplying video and multi-media data over the public telephone switched network |
US5222136A (en) | 1992-07-23 | 1993-06-22 | Crest Industries, Inc. | Encrypted communication system |
JPH0646419A (en) | 1992-07-27 | 1994-02-18 | Lsi Japan Kk | Tv charging system |
DE69331869T2 (en) | 1992-08-06 | 2002-08-29 | Fujitsu Ltd | Transaction processing system using a radio transmitting teletext system |
US5412416A (en) | 1992-08-07 | 1995-05-02 | Nbl Communications, Inc. | Video media distribution network apparatus and method |
US5502576A (en) | 1992-08-24 | 1996-03-26 | Ramsay International Corporation | Method and apparatus for the transmission, storage, and retrieval of documents in an electronic domain |
JP3579061B2 (en) | 1992-08-31 | 2004-10-20 | 株式会社東芝 | Display device |
US5432542A (en) | 1992-08-31 | 1995-07-11 | Television Computer, Inc. | Television receiver location identification |
EP0586954B1 (en) | 1992-09-11 | 2004-11-03 | Siemens Information & Communication Networks, Inc. | Techniques for producing PC displays and printed transcripts from voicemail messages |
USD362429S (en) | 1992-09-18 | 1995-09-19 | Booklink Corporation | Electronic book library for storing digitized computer readable material |
WO1994007327A1 (en) | 1992-09-21 | 1994-03-31 | Rolm Company | Method and apparatus for on-screen camera control in video-conference equipment |
US5586235A (en) | 1992-09-25 | 1996-12-17 | Kauffman; Ivan J. | Interactive multimedia system and method |
US5739814A (en) | 1992-09-28 | 1998-04-14 | Sega Enterprises | Information storage system and book device for providing information in response to the user specification |
US5799071A (en) | 1992-10-05 | 1998-08-25 | Azar; Sanjar | Telecommunications cost-minimizing system |
US5644354A (en) | 1992-10-09 | 1997-07-01 | Prevue Interactive, Inc. | Interactive video system |
US5420974A (en) | 1992-10-15 | 1995-05-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multimedia complex form creation, display and editing method apparatus |
US5418559A (en) | 1992-10-23 | 1995-05-23 | At&T Corp. | Multi-channel television converter for conventional and interactive signals |
US5446490A (en) | 1992-10-23 | 1995-08-29 | At&T Corp. | Interactive television with tailored programming |
US5742329A (en) | 1992-10-26 | 1998-04-21 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image pickup system and communication system for use in video conference system or the like |
US5388101A (en) | 1992-10-26 | 1995-02-07 | Eon Corporation | Interactive nationwide data service communication system for stationary and mobile battery operated subscriber units |
US5400401A (en) | 1992-10-30 | 1995-03-21 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | System and method for transmitting a plurality of digital services |
US5319707A (en) | 1992-11-02 | 1994-06-07 | Scientific Atlanta | System and method for multiplexing a plurality of digital program services for transmission to remote locations |
USD346620S (en) | 1992-11-04 | 1994-05-03 | Mcsorley Jeffrey E | Electronic book for displaying sheet music |
EP0672277B1 (en) | 1992-12-01 | 1998-05-13 | Microsoft Corporation | A method and system for in-place interaction with embedded objects |
US5657414A (en) | 1992-12-01 | 1997-08-12 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Auxiliary device control for a subscriber terminal |
US5367571A (en) | 1992-12-02 | 1994-11-22 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Subscriber terminal with plug in expansion card |
US5357276A (en) | 1992-12-01 | 1994-10-18 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method of providing video on demand with VCR like functions |
US5715515A (en) | 1992-12-02 | 1998-02-03 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Method and apparatus for downloading on-screen graphics and captions to a television terminal |
US5341425A (en) | 1992-12-02 | 1994-08-23 | Scientific Atlanta, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for uniquely encrypting data at a plurality of data transmission sites for transmission to a reception site |
US5440632A (en) | 1992-12-02 | 1995-08-08 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Reprogrammable subscriber terminal |
US5410326A (en) | 1992-12-04 | 1995-04-25 | Goldstein; Steven W. | Programmable remote control device for interacting with a plurality of remotely controlled devices |
US7835989B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2010-11-16 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic book alternative delivery systems |
US7509270B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2009-03-24 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic Book having electronic commerce features |
US8073695B1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 2011-12-06 | Adrea, LLC | Electronic book with voice emulation features |
US7401286B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 2008-07-15 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic book electronic links |
US5600573A (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1997-02-04 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Operations center with video storage for a television program packaging and delivery system |
ATE183352T1 (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1999-08-15 | Discovery Communicat Inc | IMPROVED TOP-UP TERMINAL FOR CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS |
US5798785A (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1998-08-25 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Terminal for suggesting programs offered on a television program delivery system |
US5986690A (en) | 1992-12-09 | 1999-11-16 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic book selection and delivery system |
US5465401A (en) | 1992-12-15 | 1995-11-07 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Communication system and methods for enhanced information transfer |
US5341426A (en) | 1992-12-15 | 1994-08-23 | Motorola, Inc. | Cryptographic key management apparatus and method |
US5392387A (en) | 1992-12-17 | 1995-02-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for enhanced data access efficiency in an electronic book |
JP3360856B2 (en) | 1992-12-18 | 2003-01-07 | 富士通株式会社 | Processor |
TW234223B (en) | 1993-01-05 | 1994-11-11 | Yuen Henry C | |
US5544320A (en) | 1993-01-08 | 1996-08-06 | Konrad; Allan M. | Remote information service access system based on a client-server-service model |
US5349638A (en) | 1993-01-25 | 1994-09-20 | Micro-Technology Inc.-Wisconsin | Universal calling/originating number identification |
US5890122A (en) | 1993-02-08 | 1999-03-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Voice-controlled computer simulateously displaying application menu and list of available commands |
US5372507A (en) | 1993-02-11 | 1994-12-13 | Goleh; F. Alexander | Machine-aided tutorial method |
US5491821A (en) | 1993-02-24 | 1996-02-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for incremental processing of computer objects |
GB9303998D0 (en) | 1993-02-26 | 1993-04-14 | Chater Ian | Introduction system |
JPH06250895A (en) * | 1993-02-26 | 1994-09-09 | Fujitsu Ltd | Structured data base system |
JPH06337896A (en) | 1993-03-31 | 1994-12-06 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Device and method for retrieving electronic book display |
US5426594A (en) | 1993-04-02 | 1995-06-20 | Motorola, Inc. | Electronic greeting card store and communication system |
JPH06303607A (en) | 1993-04-15 | 1994-10-28 | Canon Inc | Video conference system and its control method |
CA2121151A1 (en) | 1993-04-16 | 1994-10-17 | Trevor Lambert | Method and apparatus for automatic insertion of a television signal from a remote source |
JPH06311119A (en) | 1993-04-20 | 1994-11-04 | Sony Corp | Data broadcasting system |
US5408258A (en) | 1993-04-21 | 1995-04-18 | The Arbitron Company | Method of automatically qualifying a signal reproduction device for installation of monitoring equipment |
USD349923S (en) | 1993-04-26 | 1994-08-23 | Western Publishing Company, Inc. | Electronic book |
TW318315B (en) | 1993-05-03 | 1997-10-21 | At & T Corp | |
US5565908A (en) | 1993-05-07 | 1996-10-15 | Kayon Systems, Inc. | Bi-directional system for providing information, management, and entertainment services |
JP3343990B2 (en) | 1993-05-19 | 2002-11-11 | ソニー株式会社 | Magnetic disk drive |
US5375160A (en) | 1993-05-28 | 1994-12-20 | Ledler Corporation | Interface apparatus for effecting captioning and communications between a telephone line and a television |
US5365434A (en) | 1993-06-04 | 1994-11-15 | Carolyn E. Carlson | Book enhancer |
BR9406793A (en) | 1993-06-07 | 1996-01-30 | Scientific Atlanta | Subscriber terminal display system for pay-TV system display system to generate a first video signal and process in display system to generate a first video signal |
US5485221A (en) | 1993-06-07 | 1996-01-16 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Subscription television system and terminal for enabling simultaneous display of multiple services |
US5579055A (en) | 1993-06-07 | 1996-11-26 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Electronic program guide and text channel data controller |
TW235358B (en) | 1993-06-11 | 1994-12-01 | Philips Electronics Nv | CD-I pointer device with 8 directions, 1 pixel/update |
US5408465A (en) | 1993-06-21 | 1995-04-18 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Flexible scheme for admission control of multimedia streams on integrated networks |
US5621456A (en) | 1993-06-22 | 1997-04-15 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for audio-visual interface for the display of multiple program categories |
US5407357A (en) | 1993-06-30 | 1995-04-18 | Educational Insights, Inc. | Electronic testing device for use with educational books |
US5544342A (en) | 1993-06-30 | 1996-08-06 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for prefetching information in a processing system |
EP0632397A3 (en) * | 1993-07-02 | 1995-08-16 | Nippon Telegraph & Telephone | Book data service system with data delivery by broadcasting. |
US5442390A (en) | 1993-07-07 | 1995-08-15 | Digital Equipment Corporation | Video on demand with memory accessing and or like functions |
US5329590A (en) | 1993-07-08 | 1994-07-12 | Uniden America Corporation | Automatic pay-per-view reception in a satellite receiver |
US5355162A (en) | 1993-07-13 | 1994-10-11 | Pacific Ray Video Limited | Multi-standard cable television system |
US5420474A (en) | 1993-07-15 | 1995-05-30 | Osram Sylvania Inc. | Focusable lamp capsule in a cementless base |
US6173335B1 (en) | 1993-07-30 | 2001-01-09 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Structure and protocol for routing information in a system |
US5481296A (en) | 1993-08-06 | 1996-01-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Apparatus and method for selectively viewing video information |
US5437552A (en) | 1993-08-13 | 1995-08-01 | Western Publishing Co., Inc. | Interactive audio-visual work |
IL106746A (en) | 1993-08-19 | 1997-02-18 | News Datacom Ltd | CATV systems |
US5442626A (en) | 1993-08-24 | 1995-08-15 | At&T Corp. | Digital communications system with symbol multiplexers |
US5666493A (en) | 1993-08-24 | 1997-09-09 | Lykes Bros., Inc. | System for managing customer orders and method of implementation |
US5581560A (en) | 1993-08-27 | 1996-12-03 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Communication apparatus and method for simultaneous communication of audio and data signals with improved audio control |
US5377258A (en) | 1993-08-30 | 1994-12-27 | National Medical Research Council | Method and apparatus for an automated and interactive behavioral guidance system |
JPH0764893A (en) | 1993-08-31 | 1995-03-10 | Canon Inc | Network system |
FI97517C (en) | 1993-09-06 | 1996-12-27 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Packet data transmission in a digital cellular network |
US5589892A (en) | 1993-09-09 | 1996-12-31 | Knee; Robert A. | Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access |
US5499330A (en) | 1993-09-17 | 1996-03-12 | Digital Equipment Corp. | Document display system for organizing and displaying documents as screen objects organized along strand paths |
JP2781345B2 (en) | 1993-09-20 | 1998-07-30 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Information playback device |
GB2298104B (en) | 1993-09-20 | 1998-04-29 | Motorola Inc | Method and apparatus for trunked telephone access to a cable network |
US5410344A (en) | 1993-09-22 | 1995-04-25 | Arrowsmith Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method of selecting video programs based on viewers' preferences |
US5596697A (en) | 1993-09-30 | 1997-01-21 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Method for routing items within a computer system |
US5491785A (en) | 1993-09-30 | 1996-02-13 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Information retrieval device for displaying and directly refreshing the display of a dynamically modifiable document |
US5689641A (en) | 1993-10-01 | 1997-11-18 | Vicor, Inc. | Multimedia collaboration system arrangement for routing compressed AV signal through a participant site without decompressing the AV signal |
JPH07175868A (en) | 1993-10-15 | 1995-07-14 | Internatl Business Mach Corp <Ibm> | Method and system for output of digital information to medium |
CA2174336A1 (en) | 1993-10-20 | 1995-04-27 | Leo M. Cortjens | Adaptive videoconferencing system |
US5572625A (en) | 1993-10-22 | 1996-11-05 | Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. | Method for generating audio renderings of digitized works having highly technical content |
US5631693A (en) | 1993-10-25 | 1997-05-20 | Antec Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing on demand services in a subscriber system |
US5481294A (en) | 1993-10-27 | 1996-01-02 | A. C. Nielsen Company | Audience measurement system utilizing ancillary codes and passive signatures |
JPH07177277A (en) | 1993-11-02 | 1995-07-14 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Image document circulation device |
US5524201A (en) | 1993-11-03 | 1996-06-04 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Method of preparing an electronic book for a computer system |
US6243071B1 (en) | 1993-11-03 | 2001-06-05 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Tool set for navigating through an electronic book |
US5771354A (en) | 1993-11-04 | 1998-06-23 | Crawford; Christopher M. | Internet online backup system provides remote storage for customers using IDs and passwords which were interactively established when signing up for backup services |
US5481542A (en) | 1993-11-10 | 1996-01-02 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Interactive information services control system |
US5473362A (en) | 1993-11-30 | 1995-12-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Video on demand system comprising stripped data across plural storable devices with time multiplex scheduling |
US5903867A (en) | 1993-11-30 | 1999-05-11 | Sony Corporation | Information access system and recording system |
CA2459779C (en) | 1993-12-02 | 2011-02-01 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic book selection and delivery system having text in multiple formats |
US9053640B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 2015-06-09 | Adrea, LLC | Interactive electronic book |
US7865567B1 (en) | 1993-12-02 | 2011-01-04 | Discovery Patent Holdings, Llc | Virtual on-demand electronic book |
US5519780A (en) | 1993-12-03 | 1996-05-21 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | System and method for providing compressed digital teletext services and teletext support services |
EP0657833A2 (en) | 1993-12-13 | 1995-06-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Workstation conference pointer-user association mechanism |
JP3237362B2 (en) | 1993-12-27 | 2001-12-10 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Program guide display device |
US5594493A (en) | 1994-01-19 | 1997-01-14 | Nemirofsky; Frank R. | Television signal activated interactive smart card system |
US5509074A (en) | 1994-01-27 | 1996-04-16 | At&T Corp. | Method of protecting electronically published materials using cryptographic protocols |
US5531227A (en) | 1994-01-28 | 1996-07-02 | Schneider Medical Technologies, Inc. | Imaging device and method |
US5534888A (en) | 1994-02-03 | 1996-07-09 | Motorola | Electronic book |
US5466158A (en) | 1994-02-14 | 1995-11-14 | Smith, Iii; Jay | Interactive book device |
JPH07231309A (en) | 1994-02-17 | 1995-08-29 | Hitachi Ltd | Information distribution system |
US6298441B1 (en) * | 1994-03-10 | 2001-10-02 | News Datacom Ltd. | Secure document access system |
TW236744B (en) | 1994-03-23 | 1994-12-21 | Thomson Consumer Electronics | |
US5564043A (en) | 1994-03-24 | 1996-10-08 | At&T Global Information Solutions | Launching computer program upon download of data created by program |
US5598523A (en) | 1994-03-31 | 1997-01-28 | Panasonic Technologies, Inc. | Method and system for displayed menu activation using a matching distinctive arrangement of keypad actuators |
US5500794A (en) | 1994-03-31 | 1996-03-19 | Panasonic Technologies, Inc. | Distribution system and method for menu-driven user interface |
US5572652A (en) | 1994-04-04 | 1996-11-05 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | System and method for monitoring and controlling one or more computer sites |
US5602596A (en) | 1994-04-08 | 1997-02-11 | U S West Technologies, Inc. | Method for navigating a complex multimedia structure at an interactive user station |
US5537141A (en) | 1994-04-15 | 1996-07-16 | Actv, Inc. | Distance learning system providing individual television participation, audio responses and memory for every student |
US5768521A (en) | 1994-05-16 | 1998-06-16 | Intel Corporation | General purpose metering mechanism for distribution of electronic information |
US5630125A (en) | 1994-05-23 | 1997-05-13 | Zellweger; Paul | Method and apparatus for information management using an open hierarchical data structure |
US5521631A (en) | 1994-05-25 | 1996-05-28 | Spectravision, Inc. | Interactive digital video services system with store and forward capabilities |
US5477263A (en) | 1994-05-26 | 1995-12-19 | Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. | Method and apparatus for video on demand with fast forward, reverse and channel pause |
AU695912B2 (en) | 1994-06-07 | 1998-08-27 | Skillsoft Ireland Limited | A computer based training system |
AU2820695A (en) | 1994-06-08 | 1996-01-04 | Futurevision Of America Corp. | Interactive broadband multimedia system |
US5425102A (en) | 1994-06-09 | 1995-06-13 | Datasonix Corporation | Computer security apparatus with password hints |
US5475682A (en) | 1994-06-10 | 1995-12-12 | At&T Corp. | Method of regulating backpressure traffic in a packet switched network |
US5526469A (en) | 1994-06-14 | 1996-06-11 | Xerox Corporation | System for printing image data in a versatile print server |
JPH088853A (en) | 1994-06-24 | 1996-01-12 | Sony Corp | Scrambling device and descrambling device |
US5787171A (en) | 1994-06-28 | 1998-07-28 | Sony Corporation | Data transmitter and receiver |
US5453796A (en) | 1994-06-28 | 1995-09-26 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Signal swap apparatus for a television receiver having an HDTV main picture signal processor and an NTSC Pix-in-Pix signal processor |
US5624265A (en) | 1994-07-01 | 1997-04-29 | Tv Interactive Data Corporation | Printed publication remote contol for accessing interactive media |
US7181692B2 (en) | 1994-07-22 | 2007-02-20 | Siegel Steven H | Method for the auditory navigation of text |
US5538430A (en) | 1994-07-26 | 1996-07-23 | Smith; B. Gary | Self-reading child's book |
US5555441A (en) | 1994-08-02 | 1996-09-10 | Interim Design Inc. | Interactive audiovisual distribution system |
US5640193A (en) | 1994-08-15 | 1997-06-17 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Multimedia service access by reading marks on an object |
US5515098A (en) | 1994-09-08 | 1996-05-07 | Carles; John B. | System and method for selectively distributing commercial messages over a communications network |
US5586264A (en) | 1994-09-08 | 1996-12-17 | Ibm Corporation | Video optimized media streamer with cache management |
EP0701220B1 (en) | 1994-09-12 | 2001-07-04 | Adobe Systems Inc. | Method and apparatus for viewing electronic documents |
US5604824A (en) | 1994-09-22 | 1997-02-18 | Houston Advanced Research Center | Method and apparatus for compression and decompression of documents and the like using splines and spline-wavelets |
US5715314A (en) | 1994-10-24 | 1998-02-03 | Open Market, Inc. | Network sales system |
US5608449A (en) | 1994-10-31 | 1997-03-04 | Rtc Industries, Inc. | Wireless interactive consumer video system |
WO1996015517A2 (en) | 1994-11-02 | 1996-05-23 | Visible Interactive Corporation | Interactive personal interpretive device and system for retrieving information about a plurality of objects |
US5724521A (en) | 1994-11-03 | 1998-03-03 | Intel Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing electronic advertisements to end users in a consumer best-fit pricing manner |
US5600368A (en) | 1994-11-09 | 1997-02-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Interactive television system and method for viewer control of multiple camera viewpoints in broadcast programming |
US5727065A (en) | 1994-11-14 | 1998-03-10 | Hughes Electronics | Deferred billing, broadcast, electronic document distribution system and method |
US5638443A (en) | 1994-11-23 | 1997-06-10 | Xerox Corporation | System for controlling the distribution and use of composite digital works |
US7613659B1 (en) | 1994-11-28 | 2009-11-03 | Yt Acquisition Corporation | System and method for processing tokenless biometric electronic transmissions using an electronic rule module clearinghouse |
US6460036B1 (en) | 1994-11-29 | 2002-10-01 | Pinpoint Incorporated | System and method for providing customized electronic newspapers and target advertisements |
US5758257A (en) | 1994-11-29 | 1998-05-26 | Herz; Frederick | System and method for scheduling broadcast of and access to video programs and other data using customer profiles |
US5774170A (en) | 1994-12-13 | 1998-06-30 | Hite; Kenneth C. | System and method for delivering targeted advertisements to consumers |
US5799157A (en) | 1994-12-13 | 1998-08-25 | Elcom Systems, Inc. | System and method for creating interactive electronic systems to present information and execute transactions |
US5512934A (en) | 1994-12-29 | 1996-04-30 | At&T Corp. | System and method for transmission of programming on demand |
US5754172A (en) | 1995-01-09 | 1998-05-19 | Sony Corporation | Information display method |
JP2827946B2 (en) | 1995-02-09 | 1998-11-25 | 日本電気株式会社 | Video search system |
US5892900A (en) * | 1996-08-30 | 1999-04-06 | Intertrust Technologies Corp. | Systems and methods for secure transaction management and electronic rights protection |
US5530235A (en) | 1995-02-16 | 1996-06-25 | Xerox Corporation | Interactive contents revealing storage device |
US5696906A (en) | 1995-03-09 | 1997-12-09 | Continental Cablevision, Inc. | Telecommunicaion user account management system and method |
US5635918A (en) | 1995-03-16 | 1997-06-03 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling message delivery to wireless receiver devices |
US5630103A (en) | 1995-03-20 | 1997-05-13 | Smith; Patrick C. | Radio transmission system for distribution of newspaper copy in computer format to personal computers for viewing |
US5937162A (en) | 1995-04-06 | 1999-08-10 | Exactis.Com, Inc. | Method and apparatus for high volume e-mail delivery |
US5906397A (en) | 1995-04-07 | 1999-05-25 | Steve C. MacWilliams | File folder and method |
US6230202B1 (en) | 1995-05-01 | 2001-05-08 | Donald A Lewine | Method for performing transactions on the world-wide web computer network |
US5721832A (en) | 1995-05-12 | 1998-02-24 | Regal Greetings & Gifts Inc. | Method and apparatus for an interactive computerized catalog system |
US5721956A (en) | 1995-05-15 | 1998-02-24 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method and apparatus for selective buffering of pages to provide continuous media data to multiple users |
US5721908A (en) | 1995-06-07 | 1998-02-24 | International Business Machines Corporation | Computer network for WWW server data access over internet |
US5740549A (en) | 1995-06-12 | 1998-04-14 | Pointcast, Inc. | Information and advertising distribution system and method |
DE29510170U1 (en) | 1995-06-22 | 1995-11-30 | Siemens Ag | Pen-oriented small calculator in the form of a notepad |
US5778374A (en) * | 1995-08-03 | 1998-07-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Compressed common file directory for mass storage systems |
US5815662A (en) | 1995-08-15 | 1998-09-29 | Ong; Lance | Predictive memory caching for media-on-demand systems |
US5710887A (en) | 1995-08-29 | 1998-01-20 | Broadvision | Computer system and method for electronic commerce |
US6486895B1 (en) | 1995-09-08 | 2002-11-26 | Xerox Corporation | Display system for displaying lists of linked documents |
JP3441306B2 (en) | 1995-09-12 | 2003-09-02 | 株式会社東芝 | Client device, message transmission method, server device, page processing method, and relay server device |
US5844600A (en) | 1995-09-15 | 1998-12-01 | General Datacomm, Inc. | Methods, apparatus, and systems for transporting multimedia conference data streams through a transport network |
US5682206A (en) | 1995-09-25 | 1997-10-28 | Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. | Consumer interface for programming device |
WO1997012328A1 (en) | 1995-09-25 | 1997-04-03 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Optimum access to electronic documents |
EP0766183B1 (en) | 1995-09-29 | 2002-12-04 | Hewlett-Packard Company, A Delaware Corporation | Browsing electronically stored information |
US5796954A (en) | 1995-10-13 | 1998-08-18 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Method and system for maximizing the use of threads in a file server for processing network requests |
US5788504A (en) * | 1995-10-16 | 1998-08-04 | Brookhaven Science Associates Llc | Computerized training management system |
US6061504A (en) | 1995-10-27 | 2000-05-09 | Emc Corporation | Video file server using an integrated cached disk array and stream server computers |
US5737747A (en) | 1995-10-27 | 1998-04-07 | Emc Corporation | Prefetching to service multiple video streams from an integrated cached disk array |
US5742680A (en) | 1995-11-13 | 1998-04-21 | E Star, Inc. | Set top box for receiving and decryption and descrambling a plurality of satellite television signals |
DE69632736T3 (en) | 1995-11-13 | 2009-07-09 | Gemstar Development Corp., Pasadena | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DISPLAYING TEXT OR GRAPHIC DATA ON A TV SCREEN |
US5870717A (en) | 1995-11-13 | 1999-02-09 | International Business Machines Corporation | System for ordering items over computer network using an electronic catalog |
US5802526A (en) | 1995-11-15 | 1998-09-01 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for graphically displaying and navigating through an interactive voice response menu |
US5793414A (en) | 1995-11-15 | 1998-08-11 | Eastman Kodak Company | Interactive video communication system |
US5726909A (en) | 1995-12-08 | 1998-03-10 | Krikorian; Thomas M. | Continuous play background music system |
US5663748A (en) | 1995-12-14 | 1997-09-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Electronic book having highlighting feature |
US5761681A (en) * | 1995-12-14 | 1998-06-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of substituting names in an electronic book |
US5697793A (en) | 1995-12-14 | 1997-12-16 | Motorola, Inc. | Electronic book and method of displaying at least one reading metric therefor |
US5893132A (en) | 1995-12-14 | 1999-04-06 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and system for encoding a book for reading using an electronic book |
US6675384B1 (en) * | 1995-12-21 | 2004-01-06 | Robert S. Block | Method and apparatus for information labeling and control |
US5918213A (en) | 1995-12-22 | 1999-06-29 | Mci Communications Corporation | System and method for automated remote previewing and purchasing of music, video, software, and other multimedia products |
US5774109A (en) | 1995-12-29 | 1998-06-30 | Franklin Electronic Publishers, Incorporated | Electronic scrolling book with temporary interruptions |
US5737725A (en) | 1996-01-09 | 1998-04-07 | U S West Marketing Resources Group, Inc. | Method and system for automatically generating new voice files corresponding to new text from a script |
EP0880840A4 (en) | 1996-01-11 | 2002-10-23 | Mrj Inc | System for controlling access and distribution of digital property |
US5790935A (en) | 1996-01-30 | 1998-08-04 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Virtual on-demand digital information delivery system and method |
US5631694A (en) | 1996-02-01 | 1997-05-20 | Ibm Corporation | Maximum factor selection policy for batching VOD requests |
US5930768A (en) | 1996-02-06 | 1999-07-27 | Supersonic Boom, Inc. | Method and system for remote user controlled manufacturing |
US5761606A (en) | 1996-02-08 | 1998-06-02 | Wolzien; Thomas R. | Media online services access via address embedded in video or audio program |
US6115482A (en) | 1996-02-13 | 2000-09-05 | Ascent Technology, Inc. | Voice-output reading system with gesture-based navigation |
US5862325A (en) | 1996-02-29 | 1999-01-19 | Intermind Corporation | Computer-based communication system and method using metadata defining a control structure |
US5978841A (en) | 1996-03-08 | 1999-11-02 | Berger; Louis | Look ahead caching process for improved information retrieval response time by caching bodies of information before they are requested by the user |
JP3862315B2 (en) | 1996-03-13 | 2006-12-27 | キヤノン株式会社 | Image display apparatus and control method thereof |
US5893109A (en) * | 1996-03-15 | 1999-04-06 | Inso Providence Corporation | Generation of chunks of a long document for an electronic book system |
DE19611142A1 (en) | 1996-03-21 | 1997-09-25 | Bayer Ag | Process for the preparation of hydroxymethylcyclopropane |
US6025837A (en) | 1996-03-29 | 2000-02-15 | Micrsoft Corporation | Electronic program guide with hyperlinks to target resources |
US5862329A (en) | 1996-04-18 | 1999-01-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method system and article of manufacture for multi-casting audio visual material |
US5890177A (en) * | 1996-04-24 | 1999-03-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and apparatus for consolidating edits made by multiple editors working on multiple document copies |
US6016484A (en) | 1996-04-26 | 2000-01-18 | Verifone, Inc. | System, method and article of manufacture for network electronic payment instrument and certification of payment and credit collection utilizing a payment |
WO1997041688A1 (en) | 1996-04-29 | 1997-11-06 | Agostino Richard J D | Video directory entertainment and marketing method and apparatus |
US5940073A (en) | 1996-05-03 | 1999-08-17 | Starsight Telecast Inc. | Method and system for displaying other information in a TV program guide |
DE69719858T2 (en) | 1996-05-13 | 2003-12-24 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Document display system and electronic dictionary |
US5761468A (en) | 1996-05-15 | 1998-06-02 | Sun Microsystems Inc | Hardware mechanism for optimizing instruction and data prefetching by forming augmented prefetch instructions |
JP2000511304A (en) | 1996-05-22 | 2000-08-29 | エージェント ベースド カリキュラー インコーポレイテッド | Agent-based instruction system and method |
US5815671A (en) | 1996-06-11 | 1998-09-29 | Command Audio Corporation | Method and apparatus for encoding and storing audio/video information for subsequent predetermined retrieval |
US6125352A (en) | 1996-06-28 | 2000-09-26 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for conducting commerce over a distributed network |
US5956483A (en) | 1996-06-28 | 1999-09-21 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for making function calls from a web browser to a local application |
US5884288A (en) | 1996-07-01 | 1999-03-16 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Method and system for electronic bill payment |
US5850520A (en) | 1996-07-01 | 1998-12-15 | Electronic Data Systems Corporation | Method and system for electronic publication distribution including return receipt |
US5760771A (en) | 1996-07-17 | 1998-06-02 | At & T Corp | System and method for providing structured tours of hypertext files |
US6279017B1 (en) * | 1996-08-07 | 2001-08-21 | Randall C. Walker | Method and apparatus for displaying text based upon attributes found within the text |
US5956034A (en) * | 1996-08-13 | 1999-09-21 | Softbook Press, Inc. | Method and apparatus for viewing electronic reading materials |
US5850629A (en) | 1996-09-09 | 1998-12-15 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | User interface controller for text-to-speech synthesizer |
US5926624A (en) | 1996-09-12 | 1999-07-20 | Audible, Inc. | Digital information library and delivery system with logic for generating files targeted to the playback device |
EP1008258B1 (en) | 1996-09-25 | 2006-11-08 | BRITISH TELECOMMUNICATIONS public limited company | Network-based conference system |
ATE229214T1 (en) | 1996-09-25 | 2002-12-15 | Sylvan Learning Systems Inc | AUTOMATIC TESTING AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEM FOR TEACHING THE TEACHING AND MANAGING STUDENTS |
US5881269A (en) | 1996-09-30 | 1999-03-09 | International Business Machines Corporation | Simulation of multiple local area network clients on a single workstation |
US6012890A (en) | 1996-10-04 | 2000-01-11 | Instabook Corporation | Electronic bookstore vending machine |
US5923656A (en) | 1996-10-22 | 1999-07-13 | Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | Scalable broad band input-queued ATM switch including weight driven cell scheduler |
US6052717A (en) | 1996-10-23 | 2000-04-18 | Family Systems, Ltd. | Interactive web book system |
US6039575A (en) | 1996-10-24 | 2000-03-21 | National Education Corporation | Interactive learning system with pretest |
AU5069698A (en) | 1996-11-12 | 1998-06-03 | Carlos Landetta Chombo | Electronic book |
US5870767A (en) | 1996-11-22 | 1999-02-09 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for rendering hyper-link information in a printable medium from a graphical user interface |
US5903652A (en) | 1996-11-25 | 1999-05-11 | Microsoft Corporation | System and apparatus for monitoring secure information in a computer network |
US5935166A (en) | 1996-11-25 | 1999-08-10 | St. Croix Medical, Inc. | Implantable hearing assistance device with remote electronics unit |
GB9626752D0 (en) | 1996-12-23 | 1997-02-12 | Northern Telecom Ltd | Management of data structures |
FI106983B (en) | 1997-01-20 | 2001-05-15 | Hadwaco Ltd Oy | Heat transfer elements in a film evaporator or distillator and process for its preparation |
JP2751923B1 (en) | 1997-02-05 | 1998-05-18 | 日本電気株式会社 | Multipoint video conference system and multipoint video conference device |
US6452933B1 (en) | 1997-02-07 | 2002-09-17 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Fair queuing system with adaptive bandwidth redistribution |
US5850218A (en) | 1997-02-19 | 1998-12-15 | Time Warner Entertainment Company L.P. | Inter-active program guide with default selection control |
US6091930A (en) | 1997-03-04 | 2000-07-18 | Case Western Reserve University | Customizable interactive textbook |
US5787254A (en) | 1997-03-14 | 1998-07-28 | International Business Machines Corporation | Web browser method and system for display and management of server latency |
US20040219494A1 (en) | 1997-03-21 | 2004-11-04 | Boon John F. | Authoring tool and method of use |
US5844890A (en) | 1997-03-25 | 1998-12-01 | International Business Machines Corporation | Communications cell scheduler and scheduling method for providing proportional use of network bandwith |
US5959945A (en) | 1997-04-04 | 1999-09-28 | Advanced Technology Research Sa Cv | System for selectively distributing music to a plurality of jukeboxes |
US6452614B1 (en) | 1997-04-14 | 2002-09-17 | Siements Information And Communication Networks, Inc. | Organizing a user interface using different personae |
US5892915A (en) | 1997-04-25 | 1999-04-06 | Emc Corporation | System having client sending edit commands to server during transmission of continuous media from one clip in play list for editing the play list |
US6034680A (en) | 1997-04-25 | 2000-03-07 | Foundation For Concepts In Education, Inc. | Supplying supplementary information for printed books |
US6606603B1 (en) | 1997-04-28 | 2003-08-12 | Ariba, Inc. | Method and apparatus for ordering items using electronic catalogs |
US5993979A (en) | 1997-04-29 | 1999-11-30 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Skeletal columnar coatings |
US5830316A (en) | 1997-05-16 | 1998-11-03 | The Procter & Gamble Company | Method of wet pressing tissue paper with three felt layers |
US5898852A (en) | 1997-06-26 | 1999-04-27 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Load instruction steering in a dual data cache microarchitecture |
US6029141A (en) | 1997-06-27 | 2000-02-22 | Amazon.Com, Inc. | Internet-based customer referral system |
CA2239339C (en) | 1997-07-18 | 2002-04-16 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing speaker authentication by verbal information verification using forced decoding |
US5991594A (en) | 1997-07-21 | 1999-11-23 | Froeber; Helmut | Electronic book |
US5957697A (en) | 1997-08-20 | 1999-09-28 | Ithaca Media Corporation | Printed book augmented with an electronic virtual book and associated electronic data |
US6301584B1 (en) | 1997-08-21 | 2001-10-09 | Home Information Services, Inc. | System and method for retrieving entities and integrating data |
US5987482A (en) | 1997-09-08 | 1999-11-16 | International Business Machines Corporation | Computer system and method of displaying hypertext documents with internal hypertext link definitions |
US6044385A (en) | 1997-09-10 | 2000-03-28 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for efficiently managing the manipulation of large documents displayed within a computer screen |
US6252879B1 (en) | 1997-09-17 | 2001-06-26 | Sony Corporation | Single counter for controlling multiple finite state machines in a multi-port bridge for local area network |
US6631402B1 (en) | 1997-09-26 | 2003-10-07 | Worldcom, Inc. | Integrated proxy interface for web based report requester tool set |
US5986677A (en) | 1997-09-30 | 1999-11-16 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Accelerated graphics port read transaction merging |
US6101216A (en) | 1997-10-03 | 2000-08-08 | Rockwell International Corporation | Splitterless digital subscriber line communication system |
US6112049A (en) | 1997-10-21 | 2000-08-29 | The Riverside Publishing Company | Computer network based testing system |
WO1999022314A1 (en) * | 1997-10-29 | 1999-05-06 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display control device and reproduction display device for electronic books |
US6847403B1 (en) | 1997-11-05 | 2005-01-25 | Polycom, Inc. | Integrated portable videoconferencing unit |
US6029176A (en) | 1997-11-25 | 2000-02-22 | Cannon Holdings, L.L.C. | Manipulating and analyzing data using a computer system having a database mining engine resides in memory |
US6029045A (en) | 1997-12-09 | 2000-02-22 | Cogent Technology, Inc. | System and method for inserting local content into programming content |
US6006183A (en) | 1997-12-16 | 1999-12-21 | International Business Machines Corp. | Speech recognition confidence level display |
US6006236A (en) | 1997-12-22 | 1999-12-21 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Virtual navigator that produces virtual links at run time for identifying links in an electronic file |
US6359881B1 (en) | 1997-12-31 | 2002-03-19 | At&T Corp. | Hybrid fiber twisted pair local loop network service architecture |
US6335678B1 (en) | 1998-02-26 | 2002-01-01 | Monec Holding Ag | Electronic device, preferably an electronic book |
US20010011238A1 (en) | 1998-03-04 | 2001-08-02 | Martin Forest Eberhard | Digital rights management system |
US6331867B1 (en) | 1998-03-20 | 2001-12-18 | Nuvomedia, Inc. | Electronic book with automated look-up of terms of within reference titles |
US6101485A (en) | 1998-03-26 | 2000-08-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Electronic solicitations for internet commerce |
US6009401A (en) | 1998-04-06 | 1999-12-28 | Preview Systems, Inc. | Relicensing of electronically purchased software |
US6657654B2 (en) | 1998-04-29 | 2003-12-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | Camera for use with personal digital assistants with high speed communication link |
US6339842B1 (en) | 1998-06-10 | 2002-01-15 | Dennis Sunga Fernandez | Digital television with subscriber conference overlay |
US6177936B1 (en) | 1998-08-20 | 2001-01-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Browser hierarchical contextual information for web pages |
US6415316B1 (en) * | 1998-09-01 | 2002-07-02 | Aidministrator Nederland B.V. | Method and apparatus for implementing a web page diary |
US6535505B1 (en) | 1998-09-30 | 2003-03-18 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing a time-division multiplexing (TDM) interface among a high-speed data stream and multiple processors |
US6611531B1 (en) | 1998-09-30 | 2003-08-26 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Method and apparatus for routing integrated data, voice, and video traffic |
US6295542B1 (en) * | 1998-10-02 | 2001-09-25 | National Power Plc | Method and apparatus for cross-referencing text |
GB9822022D0 (en) | 1998-10-09 | 1998-12-02 | Roke Manor Research | Method and apparatus for receiving a media broadcast |
US6331865B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2001-12-18 | Softbook Press, Inc. | Method and apparatus for electronically distributing and viewing digital contents |
US6195667B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2001-02-27 | Softbook Press, Inc. | On-line menu updating for an electronic book |
US6351750B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2002-02-26 | Softbook Press, Inc. | Dynamic conversion of byte ordering for use on different processor platforms |
US6363418B1 (en) * | 1998-10-16 | 2002-03-26 | Softbook Press, Inc. | On-line image caching control for efficient image display |
US6314474B1 (en) | 1998-10-16 | 2001-11-06 | Softbook Press, Inc. | Efficient information exchange between an electronic book and a cartridge |
US6334109B1 (en) | 1998-10-30 | 2001-12-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Distributed personalized advertisement system and method |
US6167435A (en) | 1998-10-30 | 2000-12-26 | Netcreations, Inc. | Double opt-in™ method and system for verifying subscriptions to information distribution services |
US6260024B1 (en) | 1998-12-02 | 2001-07-10 | Gary Shkedy | Method and apparatus for facilitating buyer-driven purchase orders on a commercial network system |
WO2000034845A2 (en) * | 1998-12-08 | 2000-06-15 | Mediadna, Inc. | A system and method of obfuscating data |
US6269483B1 (en) | 1998-12-17 | 2001-07-31 | International Business Machines Corp. | Method and apparatus for using audio level to make a multimedia conference dormant |
US6556561B1 (en) | 1998-12-31 | 2003-04-29 | Nortel Networks Corporation | Data network for real time information |
US6683631B2 (en) * | 1998-12-31 | 2004-01-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | System and method for selecting and deselecting information in an electronic document |
US6025871A (en) | 1998-12-31 | 2000-02-15 | Intel Corporation | User interface for a video conferencing system |
CA2361371A1 (en) | 1999-01-27 | 2000-08-03 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic book having library catalog menu and searching features |
US6813249B1 (en) | 1999-02-16 | 2004-11-02 | Efficient Networks, Inc. | System and method for prefetching data |
US7051351B2 (en) | 1999-03-08 | 2006-05-23 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method of inserting advertisements into an information retrieval system display |
WO2000062229A2 (en) | 1999-04-13 | 2000-10-19 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Electronic book alternative delivery methods |
US6249785B1 (en) * | 1999-05-06 | 2001-06-19 | Mediachoice, Inc. | Method for predicting ratings |
JP2003509879A (en) | 1999-09-08 | 2003-03-11 | ディスカバリー・コミニュケーションズ・インコーポレーテッド | Video conferencing using e-book viewer |
US6320591B1 (en) | 1999-09-10 | 2001-11-20 | Gateway, Inc. | System and method for the utilization of an electronic book |
JP2003510706A (en) | 1999-09-21 | 2003-03-18 | ディスカバリー・コミニュケーションズ・インコーポレーテッド | E-book security and copyright protection system |
US6510531B1 (en) | 1999-09-23 | 2003-01-21 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Methods and systems for testing parallel queues |
US6886000B1 (en) | 1999-09-29 | 2005-04-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | On-line negotiations with dynamic profiling |
US6493734B1 (en) | 1999-10-15 | 2002-12-10 | Softbook Press, Inc. | System and method to efficiently generate and switch page display views on a portable electronic book |
EP1330728B1 (en) | 1999-10-27 | 2006-01-04 | Discovery Communications, Inc. | Method for virtual on-demand electronic book |
US6597314B1 (en) | 1999-12-07 | 2003-07-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing help and settings control to users of an electronic book |
US7185274B1 (en) | 1999-12-07 | 2007-02-27 | Microsoft Corporation | Computer user interface architecture wherein users interact with both content and user interface by activating links |
US6344853B1 (en) | 2000-01-06 | 2002-02-05 | Alcone Marketing Group | Method and apparatus for selecting, modifying and superimposing one image on another |
US6990464B1 (en) | 2000-01-11 | 2006-01-24 | Ncr Corporation | Apparatus, system and method for electronic book distribution |
US7725812B1 (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2010-05-25 | Avid Technology, Inc. | Authoring system for combining temporal and nontemporal digital media |
JP2001357219A (en) | 2000-06-15 | 2001-12-26 | Media Vision:Kk | Method and system for generating and selling book by using network |
US6725203B1 (en) | 2000-10-12 | 2004-04-20 | E-Book Systems Pte Ltd. | Method and system for advertisement using internet browser to insert advertisements |
US6891551B2 (en) * | 2000-11-10 | 2005-05-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Selection handles in editing electronic documents |
US20040039934A1 (en) | 2000-12-19 | 2004-02-26 | Land Michael Z. | System and method for multimedia authoring and playback |
US6985913B2 (en) | 2000-12-28 | 2006-01-10 | Casio Computer Co. Ltd. | Electronic book data delivery apparatus, electronic book device and recording medium |
US20020120635A1 (en) | 2001-02-27 | 2002-08-29 | Joao Raymond Anthony | Apparatus and method for providing an electronic book |
US7039643B2 (en) | 2001-04-10 | 2006-05-02 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | System, method and apparatus for converting and integrating media files |
US7020663B2 (en) | 2001-05-30 | 2006-03-28 | George M. Hay | System and method for the delivery of electronic books |
US6976028B2 (en) | 2001-06-15 | 2005-12-13 | Sony Corporation | Media content creating and publishing system and process |
US20030018543A1 (en) | 2001-06-25 | 2003-01-23 | Alger Jeffrey H. | Client portal |
GB2381086A (en) | 2001-07-30 | 2003-04-23 | Tentendigital Ltd | Learning content management system |
US7103848B2 (en) | 2001-09-13 | 2006-09-05 | International Business Machines Corporation | Handheld electronic book reader with annotation and usage tracking capabilities |
JP2003150813A (en) | 2001-11-13 | 2003-05-23 | Sony Corp | Information processing device and method, information processing system and method, and program |
TW565811B (en) | 2001-12-31 | 2003-12-11 | Ji-Ching Jou | Computer digital teaching method |
US20030236836A1 (en) | 2002-03-21 | 2003-12-25 | Borthwick Ernest Mark | System and method for the design and sharing of rich media productions via a computer network |
US20030200145A1 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2003-10-23 | Brad Krassner | Internet-based system and method for creating and distributing customized rich media marketing and sales materials via e-mail |
US8392834B2 (en) | 2003-04-09 | 2013-03-05 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Systems and methods of authoring a multimedia file |
WO2004097600A2 (en) | 2003-04-28 | 2004-11-11 | Sony Pictures Entertainment Inc. | Content management for rich media publishing system |
US20060204942A1 (en) | 2005-03-10 | 2006-09-14 | Qbinternational | E-learning system |
US20060259239A1 (en) | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-16 | Guy Nouri | System and method for providing multimedia tours |
JP2007025959A (en) | 2005-07-14 | 2007-02-01 | Fujifilm Holdings Corp | Multimedia data processor, multimedia data processing method and multimedia data processing program |
-
1999
- 1999-06-25 US US09/344,492 patent/US8095949B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2011
- 2011-12-22 US US13/335,432 patent/US20120179962A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8639694B1 (en) * | 1994-09-02 | 2014-01-28 | Google Inc. | Client-side processing of preload operations |
US6315572B1 (en) * | 1995-03-22 | 2001-11-13 | William M. Bancroft | Method and system for computerized authoring, learning, and evaluation |
US5737619A (en) * | 1995-10-19 | 1998-04-07 | Judson; David Hugh | World wide web browsing with content delivery over an idle connection and interstitial content display |
US5761485A (en) * | 1995-12-01 | 1998-06-02 | Munyan; Daniel E. | Personal electronic book system |
US6789075B1 (en) * | 1996-06-10 | 2004-09-07 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Method and system for prioritized downloading of embedded web objects |
US6584498B2 (en) * | 1996-09-13 | 2003-06-24 | Planet Web, Inc. | Dynamic preloading of web pages |
US6385614B1 (en) * | 1998-01-14 | 2002-05-07 | Netlibrary Inc. | Electronic bookshelf with multi-user features |
US6182133B1 (en) * | 1998-02-06 | 2001-01-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for display of information prefetching and cache status having variable visual indication based on a period of time since prefetching |
US8175977B2 (en) * | 1998-12-28 | 2012-05-08 | Audible | License management for digital content |
US7194678B1 (en) * | 1999-03-02 | 2007-03-20 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Dynamic web page generation method and system |
US6859805B1 (en) * | 1999-11-29 | 2005-02-22 | Actuate Corporation | Method and apparatus for generating page-level security in a computer generated report |
US6622168B1 (en) * | 2000-04-10 | 2003-09-16 | Chutney Technologies, Inc. | Dynamic page generation acceleration using component-level caching |
US6563514B1 (en) * | 2000-04-13 | 2003-05-13 | Extensio Software, Inc. | System and method for providing contextual and dynamic information retrieval |
US20030177445A1 (en) * | 2002-03-13 | 2003-09-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | System for describing markup language for mobile use, and information processing apparatus and program for generating display content |
US20040205149A1 (en) * | 2002-09-11 | 2004-10-14 | Hughes Electronics | System and method for pre-fetching content in a proxy architecture |
US20040095400A1 (en) * | 2002-11-19 | 2004-05-20 | Anderson Andrew T. | Reconfiguration of content for display on devices of different types |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9800566B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2017-10-24 | Sony Corporation | Method of using server, server reservation control apparatus and program storage medium |
US20090307078A1 (en) * | 2002-02-27 | 2009-12-10 | Ashish K Mithal | Method and system for facilitating search, selection, preview, purchase evaluation, offering for sale, distribution and/or sale of digital content and enhancing the security thereof |
US10554424B2 (en) * | 2002-02-27 | 2020-02-04 | Nytell Software LLC | Enhanced security preview of digital content |
US20120030756A1 (en) * | 2010-07-29 | 2012-02-02 | Bank Of America Corporation | User Permissions In Computing Systems |
US8484724B2 (en) * | 2010-07-29 | 2013-07-09 | Bank Of America Corporation | User permissions in computing systems |
US20120089938A1 (en) * | 2010-10-08 | 2012-04-12 | Fuminori Homma | Information Processing Apparatus, Information Processing Method, and Program |
US20140089815A1 (en) * | 2012-09-21 | 2014-03-27 | Google Inc. | Sharing Content-Synchronized Ratings |
USD771673S1 (en) * | 2015-05-21 | 2016-11-15 | Layer3 TV, Inc. | Display screen or portion thereof with graphical user interface |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US8095949B1 (en) | 2012-01-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8095949B1 (en) | Electronic book with restricted access features | |
CA2459779C (en) | Electronic book selection and delivery system having text in multiple formats | |
US9099097B2 (en) | Electronic book with voice emulation features | |
US7401286B1 (en) | Electronic book electronic links | |
US7861166B1 (en) | Resizing document pages to fit available hardware screens | |
US7716349B1 (en) | Electronic book library/bookstore system | |
US5986690A (en) | Electronic book selection and delivery system | |
US7336788B1 (en) | Electronic book secure communication with home subsystem | |
US7299501B2 (en) | Electronic book selection and delivery system having encryption and security features | |
US20090241054A1 (en) | Electronic book with information manipulation features | |
CA2457505A1 (en) | Internet-based language archiving system and education facility |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |